JP6511031B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening and closing member.

  Conventionally, a winning opening called a starting winning opening is provided in the gaming area on the gaming board, random numbers are acquired based on the winning of the hitting ball to the starting winning opening, and a determination is made based on the winning result. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine that provides a player with a predetermined profit (for example, so-called hit game) is widely spread (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2007-89978

By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, when power failure occurs, the interest of the player may be lowered.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest caused by a power failure.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is:
In a gaming machine provided with a winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening and closing member,
An opening / closing member solenoid that converts the opening / closing member from the closed state to the open state;
Game control means for controlling the game in an integrated manner;
The game control means
Operation processing means for performing required operation processing by the game control program;
Storage means capable of storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means and capable of storing and holding the stored information even if power supply to the game machine is stopped;
Validity determination means for determining the validity of the information stored and held in the storage means at the time of activation;
Opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing member solenoid;
Counting means for counting the number of game balls that have won in the winning opening;
Blackout judging means for judging whether or not a blackout has occurred;
Power outage coping means for performing processing for coping with power outage when power outage occurs ;
The counting unit is configured not to count the number of gaming balls when it is determined by the power failure determination unit that a power failure has occurred.
The opening / closing control means changes the state of an output port for outputting control data of the opening / closing member solenoid to open control for converting the opening / closing member to the open state, and returns the state to the closed state. Blockage control, and can be performed,
The blackout countermeasure means
When the power failure judging means judges that a power failure has occurred, a checksum for use in judging the validity of the information stored and held in the memory means without switching the state of the output port Calculate and store in the storage means,
The check sum includes control data of the opening / closing member solenoid which is output to the output port when it is determined by the power failure determination unit that a power failure has occurred .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the occurrence of a power failure.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a 1st special change winning a prize device. It is an expansion explanatory view showing the details of a collective display. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in special gaming state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in special gaming state. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a figure explaining a model designation command. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flow chart explaining timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining input processing. It is a flow chart explaining switch reading processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payment command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fraud & prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flow chart explaining game machine state check processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payment busy signal check process. It is a flow chart explaining V abnormal passage monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a remaining ball monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining discharge ball monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure starting opening switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flow chart explaining pre-reading big hit decision processing. It is a flowchart explaining upper large winning a prize mouth switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining lower large winning a prize mouth switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a probability change operation area | region switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a remaining ball processing timer update process. It is a flowchart explaining special processing usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining special drawing information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining the time reduction change frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game information check processing. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a process transfer setting process 1 during fan fare / interval. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing 1 during the special winning opening open. FIG. 20 is a flowchart for describing a process shift setting process 2 during the special winning opening open process. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flow chart explaining big hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining a lever solenoid control process. It is a flowchart explaining a production | presentation command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining symbol change control processing. It is a flow chart explaining common drawing game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a Fuden prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a common drawing usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the processing transfer setting processing during common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining a process in common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining a process in common drawing display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining a power transmission operation shift setting process. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect of a normal fluctuation prize-winning apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a routine charge residual ball process. It is a flow chart explaining end processing per common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining segment LED edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining abnormal discharge monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining starting opening signal editing processing. It is a figure explaining the operation mode at the time of a power failure generation | occurrence | production, and a power failure restoration. It is a figure explaining modification 1, and is a flow chart explaining main processing. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a modification 1 and a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the modification 2 and a flowchart for explaining the main processing and a diagram for explaining an operation mode at the time of power failure occurrence and at the time of power failure recovery. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the modification 3 and a flowchart for explaining the main processing and a diagram for explaining an operation mode at the time of power failure occurrence and at the time of power failure recovery. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the modification 4 and a flowchart for explaining the main processing and an operation mode at the time of power failure occurrence and at the time of power failure recovery. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the modification 5 and is a block diagram showing a part of a control system of the gaming machine and a flowchart for explaining main processing.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are internally incorporated on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration or effect, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a delivery abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. has an abnormality notification color (for example, red , And a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting a sound (for example, a sound effect). Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a lamp for notifying a dispensing abnormality may be provided on a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

  The frame decoration device 18 on the right side seen from the front side of the gaming machine 10 is one of the auxiliary effect devices capable of executing the auxiliary effect which is the effect performed corresponding to the game effect which is the effect corresponding to the progress of the game And a projecting portion 80. The projecting portion 80 is provided so as to project on the right side surface of the front frame 12, and a player who is playing a game on the gaming machine can visually recognize, and a game on which the gaming machine is playing It is also visible to people other than the disabled. The protrusion 80 includes a plurality of light emitting areas 81 arranged in the vertical direction. Each light emission area 81 can independently control the light emission mode (light on, light off, blink, light emission color, etc.), and the auxiliary effect is executed by the light emission modes of the plurality of light emission areas 81.

  In the game effect that is the effect according to the progress of the game, for example, an error notification notifying that an error has occurred in the gaming machine, a game effect relating to the special view variation display game being executed, and a prior determination about start memory There are pre-played effects for suggesting or informing the result, effect button operation effects for instructing the operation of the operation means, and a firing direction instruction notification for instructing the firing direction of the game ball in the game area. In the projecting portion 80, the light emission mode of the plurality of light emitting areas 81 is changed corresponding to the game effect selected among the game effects according to the current game state, and the auxiliary effect is executed.

  In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (reserved plate) for supplying gaming balls to a bat firing device (not shown) and gaming balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 There are provided an upper flat ball outlet 22 which flows out, a lower tray (a tray) 23 for storing gaming balls dispensed in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a hitting launch device, and the like. Further, at the upper edge portion of the upper tray 21, a presentation button 25 incorporating a presentation button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided. In addition, the effect button 25 incorporates an LED so that the light emission mode (light on, off, blink, light emission color, etc.) of the upper surface can be changed, whereby notification of the operation timing of the effect button 25 or It is possible to execute an assistance effect. That is, the effect button 25 is also one of the auxiliary effect devices capable of executing the auxiliary effect corresponding to the game effect.

Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25 A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  In addition, to the right of the effect button 25, the ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball loan from the adjacent ball lending machine, the discharge operated to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine A button 28 and a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device is supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming ball 32 toward the gaming area 32 on the front of the gaming board 30. To fire. In addition, the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to perform an operation or the like in which the player operates in the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41 and to project forward than the display surface of the display device 41 to make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) has a configuration in which three seven-segment displays (variable display areas) in which seven light emitters (segments) are arranged in a figure of eight are arranged. Each light emitter can independently change the light emission mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emission color, etc.), and by controlling the light emission mode, identification information (special symbol) can be displayed for each 7-segment display is there. In addition, it is also possible to display information by combining a plurality of 7-segment displays. In the display device 41, a decorative special view variation display game is displayed, in which a plurality of identification information (special symbols) are variably displayed corresponding to the special view variation display game and then stopped. In addition, it is possible to execute the effect concerning the special figure fluctuation indicator game due to the change of luminous feature.

  Further, above the display device 41 in the center case 40, there is provided a board effect device 44 that effects the game by operating. The board effect device 44 is a drum-type device that can rotate around an axis along the left-right direction, and is configured such that only a part of the circumferential surface facing the front can be seen by the player. . Information is displayed on the circumferential surface for each area that becomes visible when facing the front, and multiple types of information are displayed along the circumferential direction, and the information displayed on the circumferential surface facing the front Thus, the special view variation display game is performed. Further, below the display device 41 in the center case 40, a decorative special view start storage display unit 42 is provided which performs decorative special view start storage display corresponding to start storage.

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (a first start winning opening, a start winning area) for giving a start condition of the first special view variation display game is provided. The game ball having won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 5).
Further, below the starting winning opening 36, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a winning opening and the like.

  On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common drawing start gate) 34 is provided which gives a start condition of the common drawing variation display game. The game ball which has passed through the drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5).

In addition, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, which gives the start condition of the second special view fluctuation display game to the right of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and below the common view starting gate A start winning area) is provided.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened to allow the game ball to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side, and the movable member 37b is always A closed state (a disadvantage for the player) is maintained in a vertically closed state so that the game ball can not flow in. Then, when the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, it is operated so that the upper end side falls to the near side by the common electric solenoid 37c (refer to FIG. 5) as a driving device The game ball can easily change into the open state (a state advantageous to the player) into which the game ball can flow. The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 5). In addition, it is possible to be able to win even when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the closed state, and in the closed state, it may be harder to win than in the open state.

  Also, three general winning openings 35 are disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Is arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 5).

  Furthermore, on the lower right side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32, a first special variation winning device (lower prize winning opening) that can be converted into a non-accepting state and an easily accepting state according to the result of the special view variation display game. 38 and a second special variation winning device (upper large winning opening) 39 is disposed.

  The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker type opening / closing door 38c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game The state of closing the lower large winning opening (unfavorably closed state for the player) is converted to open state (state advantageous for the player). That is, the first special variation winning device 38 includes, for example, a lower winning opening that is opened and closed by the open / close door 38c driven by the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 5) as a drive device. Converts the closed lower winning opening from the closed state to the open state, thereby facilitating the flow of gaming balls into the lower winning opening, and imparting a predetermined gaming value (prize ball) to the player. ing. A lower large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 5) is disposed inside the lower large winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the lower large winning opening There is.

  The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker-type open / close door 39c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and the result of the special view variation display game as an auxiliary game The state of closing the upper big winning opening (convenient closing state for the player) is converted to open state (advantage state for the player). That is, the second special variation winning device 39 includes, for example, an upper winning opening opened and closed by an open / close door 39c driven by an upper winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 5) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state It is made to facilitate the flow of gaming balls into the upper prize winning opening by converting the upper prize winning opening from the closed state to the opened state, and gives the player a predetermined gaming value (prize ball). ing. In the inside (winning area) of the large winning opening, a large winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 5) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball that has entered the large winning opening. There is.

  The flow path of the gaming ball in the first special variation winning device 38 is shown in FIG. The lower special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a is disposed inside the first special variation winning device 38 (winning region) as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the first special variation winning device 38. ing. The game balls having entered the first special variation winning device 38 are all detected through the lower large winning opening switch 38a and flow into the upper flow passage 38j.

  The upper channel 38j is provided with a probability changing operation area 38h into which the game ball can flow, and the lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 5) so as to change the inflow probability of the game ball to the probability changing operation area 38h. An operating lever member 38i is provided. The lever member 38i is a plate-like member that can slide in the front-rear direction, and as shown in FIG. And can be converted into an open state in which the game ball can flow into the probability change operation area 38h.

  The probability changing operation area switch 38d is provided in the probability changing operation area 38h and can detect the inflow of gaming balls, and the gaming ball having flowed into the probability changing operation area 38h is detected by the probability changing operation area switch 38d, and then the lower flow path 38k Flow into Based on the detection of the game ball by the probability change operation area switch 38d, the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is made to be the high probability state after the end of the special game state.

  In addition, a passage opening switch 38g capable of detecting passage of gaming balls is provided on the lower stream side on the left side of the probability variation actuation area 38h in the upper flow passage 38j, and the gaming spheres that did not flow into the probability variation actuation area 38h are After being detected by the passage port switch 38g, it flows into the lower flow passage 38k. In the lower flow path 38k, a flow path in which gaming balls having passed through the probability change operation area 38h flow down and a flow path in which gaming balls having passed through the passage port switch 38g flow are joined on the downstream side. The discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting passage of gaming balls is provided at the downstream end of the lower flow passage 38k, and all the game balls flowing into the lower flow passage 38k are detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e After that, it flows into the discharge passage which discharges the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In the first special variation winning device 38 configured in this way, the number of gaming balls detected by the lower large winning opening switch 38a matches the number of gaming balls detected by the probability change operation area switch 38d and the passage opening switch 38g. By doing this, it can be confirmed that all the gaming balls having flowed into the upper flow passage 38j have been discharged. Furthermore, when the number of gaming balls detected by the probability change operation area switch 38d and the passage port switch 38g matches the number of gaming balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e, all the gaming balls flowing into the lower flow path 38k are all It can confirm that it was discharged. In addition, the game ball that has flowed into the first special variation winning device 38 by matching the number of in-flowing game balls detected by the lower large winning opening switch 38a and the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e. It can be confirmed that all was discharged.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is taken as the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is taken as the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the power and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike) to aim for winning to the start winning hole 36 or the left general winning hole 35, and the right side game area The game ball is fired (so-called right-handed) to win the common drawing start gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the first special fluctuation winning device 38, the second special fluctuation winning device 39, and the general winning opening 35 on the right It is possible to aim at

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game and the common view start gate 34 making the special view change display game. A collective display device 50 is provided which displays a common drawing variation display game triggered by winning and various information.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the collective display device 50 is a special view 1 display for the first special view fluctuation display game configured of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like (a first special view fluctuation display unit ) 51 (D1) and the special figure 2 display (the second special figure variation display unit) 52 (D2) for the second special figure variation display game, and the start of the first special figure variation display game configured with the LED lamp A special figure 1 reserve display 54 (D11, D12) for informing the storage number and a special figure 2 reserve indicator 55 (D13, D14) for informing the start memory number of the second special figure variation display game are provided.

In addition, round indicatory department 60 (D3-D7) which indicates the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of opening and closing of the 2nd special fluctuation winning a prize device 39) in collective display 50, time saving state (during general public support, specific gaming state) First game state display unit 76 (D9) to inform the player of whether or not the player is in the middle), and to inform the player of a striking strike (blunt corresponding to the gaming state) in the left strike (normal strike) and the right strike 2 A gaming state display unit 77 (D8) is provided. In addition, a third gaming state display unit (third gaming state indicator, probability state display unit) 78 (D17) is provided to display that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. It is done.
Further, the batch display device 50 includes a common drawing indicator 74 (D10, D18) for a common drawing variation display game, and a common drawing reservation indicator 75 (D15, D16) for informing the start memory number of the common drawing variation display game. And is provided.

  The special view variation display game in the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 is, for example, the middle of the variation display game, ie, while the decorative special view variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 ms. In the case of the present embodiment, in the first special view variable display game in the special view 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. The eighth segment is also driven to blink to indicate that it is changing, and it is configured to be able to distinguish between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. In addition, a plurality of identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the special figure variation display game may be sequentially displayed to indicate that the variation is in progress. Then, when the result of the game is "detachment", for example, the central segment (in addition to the special segment 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on as a result mode of the declination, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the game result is displayed with the result mode (e.g., numbers and symbols) other than the result mode of the offset being on as the hit result mode (special result mode).

The special figure 1 reserve display 54 shows the number of undivided balls (the number of first start memories = the number of reserve) among the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36 which becomes the variation start condition of the special figure 1 indicator 51. As shown in 4 (c), display is performed by turning off and lighting (flickering) a plurality of LEDs.
The special figure 2 reserve display 55 sets the number of undivided balls (second starting memory number = reserve number) among the number of winning balls to the normal variation winning device 37 which becomes the variation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52, As shown in FIG. 4C, display is performed by turning off and on (flashing) the plurality of LEDs.
The round display unit 60 is configured of an LED lamp or the like, turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and is selected according to the result during the special game state as shown in FIG. 4 (d). Turn on the LED corresponding to the number of rounds. The round display unit may be configured by a 7-segment display.

As shown in FIG. 4E, the first gaming state display unit 76 turns on the LED when it is in the time saving state, and turns off the LED when it is not in the time saving state.
As shown in FIG. 4 (e), the second game state display unit 77 turns off the LED when the game state in which the left hit is more advantageous to the player than the right hit (normal hit), If the game state in which the player's right strike is more advantageous to the player than the left strike (right strike), the LED is turned on.
As shown in FIG. 4E, the third gaming state display unit 78 turns on the LED when the power is on in the high probability state, and turns off the LED if it is not in the high probability state.

During the fluctuation display of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing fluctuation display game in the common drawing display 74 alternately changes the symbol number for fluctuation shown in FIG. 4 (g) and turns on two LEDs alternately. Display that it is changing. When the result is hit, it is turned on in a lighting mode according to the type of the light to indicate that it is hit, and when the result is out, it is turned off to indicate that it is not. .
The common drawing reserve display 75 sets the number of undigested balls (the number of common drawing start memories = the number of reservations) of the passing balls of the common drawing start gate 34 serving as the fluctuation start condition of the common drawing display 74 as shown in FIG. As shown in f), display is performed by turning off and lighting (flickering) a plurality of LEDs.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main substrate) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and a gaming microcomputer 111 (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). And an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference clock for the CPU operating clock or timer interrupt and a random number generation circuit. An oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like is generated. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply apparatus 400 to be operable Be done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V and a DC-DC converter that generates DC voltages of 12 V and 5 V lower than DC voltage of 32 V. A power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure, having a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 111 at power failure and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are targets of replacement at the time of model change, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a substrate different from the power supply 400 Can be removed from the target of replacement and cost reduction can be achieved.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. That is, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 111C) serves as a backup storage means capable of holding stored data even when the power is shut off (the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped). Then, when power is restored, control can be resumed based on the data held by the backup storage means.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.
Although the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 may be performed to cancel the error other than when the power is turned on, in this case only the error is canceled and the process such as the initialization of the RAM 111C is not performed .

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a random access memory (RAM) 111C which can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariable information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine variation patterns by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 stored as start storage. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included. In addition, a fluctuation pattern table for determining fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game is also stored.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is obtained, derivation is already made at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed display results satisfy the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same The state where the identification information is obtained, but excluding the special result aspect) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as reach effects such as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. Expected values are set to increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various A variation pattern random number for determining the variation display game execution time etc. in reach display or non-reach variation display, and a random number generation circuit for generating a collision random number etc for determining hit of the common drawing variation display game And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. There is.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result (big hit or break) of the special figure variation display game, a probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current gaming state, the current game One of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of variation pattern tables based on the operation status (time saving operation status) of the normal variation winning prize apparatus 37 as the status, the number of starting memories, and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize balls. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and performs control for dispensing the ball.

  Various switches and sensors are connected to the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111. Then, interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b receive signals of negative logic such as high level 11V and low level 7V supplied from these switches and convert them into 0V-5V positive logic signals. Is provided. In the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, when the input range is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is incorrectly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut. It is possible to detect an abnormal state as if it were floating and to output an abnormality detection signal.

  The proximity I / F 121a, 121b, the gate switch 34a in the common view start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the lower special winning opening switch 38a in the first special variation winning device 38, the second special Upper prize winning opening switch 39a in the fluctuation winning device 39, probability changing operation area switch 38d provided in the probability changing operation region 38h in the first special fluctuation winning device 38, start opening 1 switch 36a in the start winning opening 36, normal fluctuation winning The starting opening 2 switch 37a in the device 37, the passage opening switch 38g for detecting game balls which did not flow into the positive change operation area 38h in the first special variation winning device 38, the game discharged from the first special variation winning device 38 A discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting a ball and a board radio sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine are connected.

  The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b are supplied to the second input port 123 and the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower large winning opening switch 38a, the upper large winning opening switch 39a, the positive change operation area switch 38d, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening The detection signal of the 2 switch 37 a is input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, detection signals of the passage port switch 38g, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, and the panel radio sensor 62, and abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected. Is input to the third input port 124.
Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a frame radio wave fraud signal from the payout control device 200 (provided on the front frame 12). A signal output based on the detection of a radio wave by the frame radio sensor detected and the payout busy signal (a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command) are also input. . Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal of the vibration sensor switch may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b, the output to the second input port 123 and the output of the passage port switch 38 g of the outputs to the third input port 124 are transmitted from the main board 100 to the relay board 70. It is also supplied to the non-illustrated test shot testing device via Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, detection signals of the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. .

  As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It is supposed to be.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a payout abnormal status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormal) from the payout control device 200, a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (bottom A signal that is output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the tray 23 at least a predetermined amount (full), a signal based on a touch switch signal (input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) ) Is provided and supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In the first input port 122, a detection signal of a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided in the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10, a body frame opening detection provided in the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10, etc. The detection signal of the switch 64 is also input.

  In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test injection test apparatus is turned off. Is configured as. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch requiring no processing such as a starting port switch output from the proximity I / F 121a, 121b is supplied to the test shot test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done to the trial shot test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b which opens the first special fluctuation winning device 38, the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b which opens the second special fluctuation winning device 39, ordinary A common power solenoid 37c for opening the variable winning device 37 and a second output port 134 for outputting operation data of a lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member 38i in the first special variable winning device 38 are provided. The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided to output on / off data of the digit line (common line) to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b, the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b, the common high power solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f output from the second output port 134 and receives solenoid driving signals. First driver (drive circuit) 138a for generating and outputting, second driver 138b for outputting ON / OFF driving signal of segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 outputted from the third output port 135, fourth output The third driver 138 c for outputting the on / off driving signal of the digit line on the current lead-in side of the batch display device 50 output from the port 136 and the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device A fourth driver 138 d for outputting to the external information terminal board 71 is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection apparatus 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

  Although not particularly limited, the start opening 1 switch 36a in the start winning opening 36, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower large winning opening switch 38a, the upper large The winning opening switch 39a, the probability changing operation area switch 38d in the first special variation winning device 38, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, and the passing opening switch 38g have a coil for magnetic detection and the magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) which detects a game ball using a phenomenon is used. Also, a micro-switch having a mechanical contact on the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like and the body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 etc. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG.
The effect control device 300 controls the display of the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A device control circuit 312 and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies, sound effects and the like from the speakers 19a and 19b are provided.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at power failure A FeRAM 323 which can be held, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents, and instructs the display control circuit 312 to display contents, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, and turns on the decoration lamp. Execute processing such as drive control of motor and solenoid, management of presentation time, etc. The display control circuit 312 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340.

  A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, etc.) is transmitted via the command I / F 331 to the decoration special drawing reservation number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Receive as). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), the front frame 12, A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15 is provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls the panel effect device 44 (for example, a movable object or the like which enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. A frame rendering movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame rendering device is provided with a frame rendering device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for rendering) on the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15. You may have it.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided in the effect button 25, the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. To detect the on / off state of the effect combination product switch 47 (rendering motor switch) to detect the detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, DC12V for driving display device 41 and motor and LED, and DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, it is configured to generate DC15V voltage for driving motor, LED and speaker It is done. Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. In addition, the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, the display device control circuit 312, the control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp and motor, etc. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by striking a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by turning members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the common view starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 , Or start winning prize opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 to play the game area It is discharged from 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39, the number according to the type of winning opening that has won The prize balls are discharged from the dispensing unit controlled by the dispensing control device 200 (see FIG. 5) to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15.

  A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5) including a non-contact switch or the like for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the common view start gate 34 is provided in the common view start gate 34, and the game area 32 When the game ball driven in passes through the inside of the drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100, the number of common drawing start memories is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34. If it is less than (1), the common drawing start memory number is added (+1) and one common drawing start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of memories of the common drawing start winning combination is displayed on the common drawing reservation display 75 of the batch display device 50. Further, the common drawing start memory stores a random number value (hit random number) for hit determination for determining the result of the common drawing variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a. It is supposed to be

  If the common drawing start memory is present and the common drawing fluctuation display game can be started, that is, the common drawing fluctuation display game is not being executed, and the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted If it is not the hit state, the hit determination random number value stored in the first stored common drawing start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit deviation of the common drawing fluctuation display game And perform a process of starting a common drawing variation display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the common drawing variation display game becomes a hit, and a specific result aspect (common drawing identification result) is derived.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 predetermines a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined for a predetermined fluctuation time in the common drawing indicator 74 provided in the collective display device 50 as processing for executing the common drawing fluctuation display game. After displaying the common map during the repeated display in the above order, a processing for displaying the common map change display game is performed to stop and display the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result. In addition, the general-purpose display 74 is configured by the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after being displayed variably for a predetermined time, they are stopped and displayed. You may configure.

  If the result of the popular drawing variation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern which becomes either the first hit stop symbol or the second hit stop symbol which makes a special result aspect in the common symbol display 74 corresponding to the type of the hit The stop display is performed, and the common voltage solenoid 37c is operated to open the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is a release, control is performed to display a lighting pattern which is a result of the deviation on the common drawing display 74.

  In addition, the winning balls to the start winning hole 36 and the winning balls to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a respectively provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100, the first start memory, which makes a start memory (a special figure start memory) based on winning on the start winning hole 36, is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). In addition to storing, the second starting memory which makes starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the prize winning to the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is stored with a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four pieces) as a limit. A big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information based on winning on the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the extracted disturbances are extracted The numerical values are stored in the RAM 111B as the first start storage and the second start storage. The number of start-up memories is displayed on the special view 1 reserve display 54 or the special view 2 reserve display 55 of the collective display 50, and is displayed as a decorative special view start store display at a predetermined location of the center case 40. Be done.

  The CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first start memory corresponding to the special view change display game to be started when the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game can be started. A process of determining the hit of the special figure variation display game or the like is performed by comparing the determined big hit determination random number value with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B. Furthermore, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special view variation display game to be executed.

  And, when executing the first special figure fluctuation display game, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 1 display 51 (the fluctuation display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the special figure 1 is displayed during the change, a process is performed to display a first special figure change display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, when the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 2 display 52 (the variable display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the special figure 2 is displayed during the change, a process of displaying a second special figure change display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, etc.) corresponding to the special view change display game by the display device 41 (the change display device). To display a variation display game of a special feature variation display game. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  The decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 is, for example, a left variation display area (first special symbol), a right variation display area In each of the second special symbol) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high speed variation) at a speed that makes identification difficult. Then, the symbols changing after a predetermined time are stopped sequentially in the order of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area, and stopped in each of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. In addition, in the display device 41, various effect displays such as changes in display color and fluctuation mode are performed to improve interest.

  And, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a lighting pattern as a special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, and Perform processing to generate a gaming state. In addition, the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode.

  In the processing for generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111A of the gaming control device 100 opens the open / close door 38c of the first special variation winning device 38 by the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b, and flows the gaming ball into the lower large winning opening. The second special variation winning device 39 is opened and closed by the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b, and the game ball is allowed to flow into the upper large winning opening. Then, a special winning opening is performed until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls win in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time elapses from opening of the special winning opening. Is a round, and the control (cycle game) is performed to repeat (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is disapproval, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

  In addition, when the game ball flows into the probability change operation area 38h of the first special variation winning device 38 in the specific round, the game control apparatus 100 can generate the high probability state as the game state after the end of the special game state. ing. This high probability state is a state in which the probability that a special result is obtained in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure even in the high probability state based on the result form of the special figure fluctuation display game of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control apparatus 100 can generate a time saving state (a specific game state, a common drawing high probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short time state, the probability (common drawing probability) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is set to a high probability (general drawing high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general drawing low probability state) Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is larger than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the low probability state.

  For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (common drawing fluctuation time) of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above to be a second fluctuation display time shorter than the first fluctuation display time. Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing variation display game to be a second stop time shorter than the first stop time. Also, in the time saving state, when the regular drawing fluctuation display game is hit and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened, the opening time (the public opening time) is longer than the first opening time of the normal state. It is possible to control to become 2 opening time. Moreover, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening (the number of times of general electric power release) of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is larger than the number of first open times with respect to one hit result of the common drawing change display game. It is possible to set to Also, in the time saving state, the probability (general drawing probability) to be a hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is a high probability (for example) 250/251 higher than the low probability (for example 0/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to

  In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of common power release times, the common power release time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. In the present embodiment, the movable member 37b is set so as not to be opened in the normal operation state (a common drawing probability is 0). In the case of a hit, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  The special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special view fluctuation display so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use separate display devices or separate display areas in the first special view variable display game and the second special view variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. The decoration special feature variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently and simultaneously, though it is good. Further, the special view variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10. In addition, the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are executed in the order of generation of start storage. Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are not distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as a special view variation display game.

  7 and 8 show the operations of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 in the special gaming state. There are five types of special results, 12R positive variation, 5R positive variation, 5R normal, 4R positive variation, and 4R normal, which are selected based on the jackpot symbol random number. The number of each big hit type indicates the number of rounds, and the positive change indicates that there is a high possibility that the game ball will flow into the positive change operation area 38h and it is likely to be in the high probability state (positive change state) after the special game state ends. Indicates that there is a low possibility that the game ball will flow into the probability change operation area 38h, and it is difficult to be in the high probability state (probability state) after the end of the special game state. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, whether or not the game ball is in the high probability state is determined depending on whether or not the gaming ball flows into the probability variation actuation region 38h, so the probability variation actuation region 38h even if the jackpot type is definite variation If the game ball does not flow in, the high probability state is not obtained, and if the game ball flows into the probability change operation area 38h even if the type of the big hit is normal, the state becomes the high probability state.

  FIG. 7 shows the open mode in each round for each jackpot type. The details of the open mode are shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7 (a), in the 12R positive variation, the lower V release is performed to open the first special variation winning device 38 in the first round. The lower V open is an open mode in which the gaming ball is likely to flow into the probability change operation area 38 h. Then, after the second round, the upper long opening for opening the second special variation winning device 39 and the lower long opening for opening the first special variation winning device 38 are alternately performed. Similarly, the 5R positive variation and the 4R positive variation in which the jackpot type is a positive variation perform the lower V release to open the first special variation winning device 38 in the first round. In addition, in the 5R normal mode and the 4R mode in which the jackpot type is normal, the lower short circuit opening is performed to open the first special variation winning device 38 in the first round. The lower short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility that the gaming ball flows into the probability change operation area 38 h is lower than the lower V opening.

  Since the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are alternately opened in any jackpot type, the passage of a predetermined openable time or a predetermined number of gaming balls must be won When the predetermined interval time has elapsed after the end of the round, the other special fluctuation winning device is released. In addition, it is only the lower V open and the lower short open performed in the first round that gaming balls can be made to flow into the positive change operation area 38 h. Since the upper long opening and the upper short opening open the second special variation winning device 39, there is no possibility that the gaming ball will flow into the probability change operation area 38h. In addition, since the lever member 38i is not operated in the lower long opening or the lower short opening other than the first round, there is no possibility that the gaming ball will flow into the probability changing operation area 38h. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round which is the round in which the gaming balls may flow into the probability change operation area 38h forming the specific area is the first round. Of course, this particular round may be a round other than the first round.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), in the upper long opening, the second special variation winning device 39 is opened with the start of the round (t11), or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces) of 25,000 ms of available opening time elapses. When one of the conditions for winning of the game ball is satisfied, the second special variation winning device 39 is closed to complete the round (t12). Thereafter, the interval time and upper large winning opening remaining ball processing time is started (t12), and when the interval time is over, the next round is started (t13). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set along with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the special game state, since the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are alternately opened, the first special variation winning with the lapse of the interval time Although the device 38 is opened, the second special variation winning device 39 continues the upper prize winning opening remaining ball processing time. The lower short circuit shown in FIG. 8 (b) is the same as the upper long ball except that the openable time and the interval time are different.

  As shown in FIG. 8C, in the lower V opening, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Further, with the start of the round, the lever solenoid 38f is turned ON, and the positive change operation area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member 38i covers the probability changing operation area 38h and the gaming ball can not flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member 38i retracts from the probability changing operation area 38h. The gaming ball is ready to flow. Further, the state in which the probability changing operation area switch 38d is effective is a state in which the detection of the gaming ball by the probability changing operation area switch 38d is treated as being effective. On the other hand, the state in which the probability change operation area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which the detection of the gaming ball by the probability change operation area switch 38d is treated as being invalid.

  The lever solenoid 38f is turned off after 64 ms have elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, when 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability change operation area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, there is a possibility that the game ball won immediately after the first special variation winning device 38 opens may flow into the probability variation operation area 38h.

  When 200 ms have passed since the start of the round, the first special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed (t34). Then, when 2700 ms elapses, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened again (t35), and a condition of either a 25000 ms openable time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins is satisfied. Then, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t39). Thereafter, the interval time and the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing time are started (t39), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t41).

  In addition, after the second opening (t35) of the first special variation winning device 38, the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). In addition, the probability change operation area switch 38d is also effective (t36). The second opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is an opening for a sufficiently long time, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f also continues for a long time, so the gaming ball flows into the positive changing operation area 38h almost certainly It will be. Therefore, when the jackpot type is positive, the probability state is almost certainly high.

  Also, the lever solenoid 38f can be turned on for a predetermined time after the first special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special fluctuation winning device 38 just before closing. The game ball can also flow into the probability change operation area 38h. It should be noted that the first special variation winning device 38 is closed by the lapse of the openable time or when a predetermined number of gaming balls wins, and the gaming ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 is a lower prize winning opening residual ball processing When all the balls are discharged, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off with the end of the remaining ball processing time (t42) to end the operation, and the positive change operation area switch 38d is invalidated.

  In addition, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed by the lapse of the openable time or when the predetermined number of gaming balls wins, and all the gaming balls that have won the first special variation winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time If the lever solenoid 38f is completely discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t43), the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the completion of the discharge and the operation is ended. The positive change operation area switch 38d is invalidated.

  In addition, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed by the lapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of gaming balls are winning, and the gaming ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 is the lower winning prize opening ball processing time In the case where all of the lever solenoid 38f is not discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t43), the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t43) When the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the operation is ended. In this case, when 100 ms elapses after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43), the positive change operation area switch 38d becomes invalid (t44).

  As shown in FIG. 8 (d), in the lower short opening, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variation winning device 38 in the lower V opening is performed (t51 to t54), and based on the opening being ended. End the round (t54). Since the opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is an opening for a very short time and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also a short time, the possibility of the game ball flowing into the positive changing operation area 38h is low. Therefore, when the jackpot type is normal, the probability state is high.

  The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the switching between valid and invalid of the probability variation operation area switch perform the same operation as in the case of the lower V open as long as the gaming ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 (t56 ~ T63). Therefore, when the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 even if the lower large winning opening residual ball processing time has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. And end the operation, and the positive change operation area switch 38d is invalidated. If all gaming balls are not ejected by the end (t62) of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off after the period (t62) in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state. After the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t62), when 100 ms elapses, the positive change operation area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63).

  However, the control of the lever solenoid 38f and the positive change operation area switch 38d as shown in FIG. 8D in the lower short circuit opening is performed only when the lower short circuit opening is performed in the first round. When the lower short circuit opening is performed in other rounds, the lever solenoid 38f is not operated, and the positive change operation area switch 38d also remains invalid. In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set along with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (e), in the lower long opening, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t61), or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces) of 25,000 ms of the openable time elapse When one of the conditions for winning of the game ball is satisfied, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed to complete the round (t62). Thereafter, the interval time and the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing time are started (t62), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t63). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set along with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set. In the lower long open state, the lever solenoid 38f is kept in the OFF state, and the positive change operation area switch 38d is also kept invalid.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main processing shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 and the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started by turning on the power. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, first, the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area to save the value of the register etc when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the upper order, and the head 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step S5). The release permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and a process of setting a power on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power-on delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. It can be detected. That is, when the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing that. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

  After the process of setting the power on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the waiting time (steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, set the number of times (for example, 2) to read the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 through the port and the data bus (for example, 2 times) (step S8) Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 monitors the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure does not occur, the power on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11). Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time is over, the access permission of read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). And outputs the off data to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15) and read first. From the state of the first input port 122, it is determined whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

  If the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S17). If it is (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection region 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection region check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), the checksum calculation processing of calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and power off It is determined whether the check sums of the two match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 of FIG. 10 to perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure. That is, when the supply of power to the gaming machine is started, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes validity determination means for determining the validity of predetermined data stored in the storage means (RAM 111C).

  When it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N), If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (does not match) (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 10 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. I

In step S21 of FIG. 10, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area and an error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared to indicate that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined.
Thereafter, the area storing the gaming state in the RWM is checked to determine whether the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is the high probability state (step S22). Here, when it is not in the high probability of the special view (step S22; N), the process skips steps S23 and S24 and shifts to step S25. If the special drawing is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator, provided on the game board 30) The on (lighting) data of the third gaming state display section 78) is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the below-mentioned special figure game processing is transmitted to the production control board (presentation control device 300) (step S25), step S31 Go to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a screen designated command (a command for a customer waiting demo screen when waiting for a customer, other than that If so, a plurality of commands such as a recovery screen command are sent. That is, when the legitimacy determination means confirms the legitimacy, the game is resumed based on the data stored in the storage means.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step S26), and all areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). Here, the area to be initialized is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the effect mode. Then, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (displaying a customer waiting demo screen and displaying a predetermined time (for example, Send a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying the initialization of the RAM with light and sound for 30 seconds).

  In step S31, processing is performed to activate a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process of step S31, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S32). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining symbols per special drawing) Save a specific area of RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number), random number which determines hit of common drawing (hit random number), random number which determines hit symbol of common drawing (touch symbol random number) From step S33, the interrupt is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock at a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, the big hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number is a program processing unit timer interrupt It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC 2) different from CTC (CTC 0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as processing. In addition, in the big hit design random number, in per random number, in per design random number, adopting the so-called “initial value change method” which changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every round of random number There is. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random type update in which all the values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number is a random number updated by the hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus is set (step S36) It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, and the initial value random number update processing in the above step S35 is performed in both cases when such a method is adopted. In order to prevent the value random number update process from being performed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. There is no problem in canceling the interrupt before the initial value random number update process if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed but is performed only in the main process, and the main process It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination (step S37) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the processing for temporarily prohibiting the interrupt (step S39) A process (step S40) of outputting off data to the output port is performed.

  Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step S41), and the blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step S42). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum at the time of power interruption of the RWM, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), and then a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45) ) And wait for the power to the game machine to shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means delays the activation of the main control means when the power is turned on and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device, and the predetermined standby time Will monitor the occurrence of a power failure.

  Further, the game apparatus 100 is provided with a power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected. It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of external operation, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization unit (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

  FIG. 11 shows the type of model specification command which is one of the commands transmitted in step S25 and step S30. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, model type A as a plurality of model types having different control contents such as the probability of becoming a big hit, the number of times of execution of special pattern variation display game becoming short time state, big hit type and distribution, and distribution of effects. There are four types of ~ D. Furthermore, each model type includes a plurality of types of models having different model names. For example, model type A includes three types of model names A-1, A-2, and A-3.

  The game control apparatus 100 is set to any one of a plurality of types of model types, and is also set to any one of a plurality of types of model names included in the model type. . The model designation command is a command different depending on the model type and model name, and when the power is turned on, the model designation command according to the model type and model name set in the game control device 100 is transmitted to the effect control device 300 .

  Based on the received model designation command, the effect control device 300 can grasp the model type and model name set in the game control device 100. Then, a default symbol corresponding to the received model specification command is displayed on the display device 41. Thus, the model type and model name of the model can be confirmed by checking the display on the display device 41 when the power is turned on.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the command is composed of MODE and ACTION, and in the model designation command, MODE is a value indicating that it is a model designation command (here, 05H), and ACTION corresponds to the model type and model name. Value. For example, when the model type is A and the model name is A-1, a model specification command of MODE 05H and ACTION 61H is transmitted as a model specification command. Then, the effect control device 300 recognizes that it is the model name A-1 in the model type A based on the model specification command of MODE 05H and ACTION 61H, and displays the display device 41 as a default symbol. Display 131.

  In the default symbol, the upper two digits correspond to the model type and the lower one digit corresponds to the model name, so the model type and model name can be easily confirmed. Of course, the default symbol is not limited to that shown in FIG. 11 and can be set arbitrarily. However, it is also possible not to use a symbol (for example, 767) which is a combination of reach and a symbol (for example, 777) which is a combination of big hit. In addition, the default symbol may be a symbol combination that can appear in the decorative special symbol variation display game, or may be a symbol combination that does not appear in the decorative special symbol variation display game. In addition, each symbol included in the default symbol may be a symbol other than the identification information of the decorative pattern variation display game, in part or in whole. In addition, although the default symbol is a symbol according to the model type and the model name, it may be a symbol corresponding to only one of the model type and the model name.

  In addition, after a default symbol corresponding to a model type and a model name is displayed for a certain period of time, a second default symbol may be displayed. The second default symbol may be of any kind, but for example, it may be a common symbol regardless of the model type and model name, and the appearance may be the same even for gaming machines of the same model but different model types. . Also, the second default symbol may be a symbol common to other models. Further, the second default symbol may be set in the game arcade.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 12 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the head address of RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and "0" is set as the calculated value (step S53). . The number of bytes of RAM being used is set to the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is taken as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), and the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56). It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step S57). If the calculation is not completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process is ended.

Initial Value Random Number Update Process
FIG. 13 shows the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number updating process, the jackpot symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62), and the symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63). Ends the initial value random number update process.
Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, and "hit initial value random number" is a random number that determines the hit of the common figure variation display game A random number that is an initial value of "per-pattern initial value random number" is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines a stop symbol of the common-pattern variation display game. Thus, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 14 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to the RWM.
Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different.
Next, input from various sensors and switches, and taking in of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed.

  Next, based on the output data set in the various processes, drive control of actuators such as solenoids (lower large winning opening solenoid 38b, upper large winning opening solenoid 39b, common solenoid 37c, lever solenoid 38f), etc. An output process (step S104) is performed. Note that when a signal for stopping the emission is output in step S5 in the main processing, the output processing causes the emission permission signal to be output, and the emission permission signal can be set to the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of release permission seen from the game control device, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating the state of release permission viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) are performed.
Next, whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a of the common drawing, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower large winning opening switch 38a, and the upper large winning opening switch 39a A prize hole switch / state monitoring process (step S108) is performed to monitor the condition of the object or monitor an error (whether or not the front frame or the glass frame is opened).

  Next, it is determined whether an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S109). The abnormal discharge error is to detect the discharge from the upper flow passage 38j despite the fact that the game balls existing in the upper flow passage 38j are 0, or the gaming balls existing in the lower flow passage 38k are 0 Nevertheless, it is to detect the discharge from the lower flow path 38k (see FIG. 81). When the abnormal discharge error is occurring, the abnormal discharge error flag is set.

  If an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S109; Y), the process proceeds to step S113. That is, the game is prevented from proceeding. In addition, when the abnormal discharge error is not occurring (step S109; N), the special figure game process which performs the process regarding the special figure fluctuation display game (step S110), the common drawing game process which performs the process regarding the common drawing fluctuation display game (step S111) A segment LED editing process (step S112) is provided which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special view variation display game and various information related to the game to display desired contents.

Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process (step S113), a magnet fraud monitoring process (step S114) that checks a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is an abnormality, a detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 A board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S115) is performed to check whether there is an abnormality or not. Then, an external information editing process (step S116) is performed to set a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and the timer interrupt process is ended.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, ie, the first input port 122, is read (step S121). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

  Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), and the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124). And the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM (step S125). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is an inverted bit of the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data Are prepared (step S127), and the switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, "prepare" in the present embodiment means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.

  Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is an inverted bit of the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data Are prepared (step S132), the switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is ended.

Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 may be different data but may be data of the same value as a result. is there.
Moreover, although the bit data to be inverted of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data, there is a possibility that they may be data of the same value as a result. is there.

[Switch reading process]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), and the bit necessary for inversion is inverted (step S143), and the port input state of the target switch control area is saved. (Store) (Step S144).
Then, it waits for the delay time (for example, about 100 microseconds) until the second reading to elapse (step S145).

When the delay time has elapsed, the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), and the bit necessary for inversion is inverted (step S148), and the port input state of the target switch control area (1 The data of the second time is loaded, and the inverted data (the second data) is saved (stored) in the port input state (step S149).
After that, a definite bit pattern in which the bit in the same state is 1 and the bit different is 0 in the first and second readings is created (step S150), the logical bit of the bit pattern and the port input state is taken, Let it be a bit (step S151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern in which the state is 0 and the other bit is 1 in the first and second readings is created (step S152), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the determined state at the previous interrupt The product is taken and it is set as the previously held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain the state of a signal from which noise due to chattering of a switch or the like has been removed.
Then, the currently determined bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved as the currently decided state (step S154), exclusive OR is performed between the previous and currently decided states, and saved as the rising edge (step S155). , Finish the switch reading process.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing the result with the previous reading result. Although there is a method of determining whether or not a change has occurred, if the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that the correct determination can not be made. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interruption process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 which outputs data of the segment of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output is synthesized and output to the output port 134 for outputting data of the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b, the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b, the common solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f (step S162).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step S164). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, data of "door / frame open" data of "security signal") are output ports for digit / external information output It outputs to 136 (step S166).

  Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S168). As a result, the plurality of light emitting display portions provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are synthesized (step S169), and the synthesized data (for example, data of "big hit signal 1", data of "big hit signal 2", data of "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal" Output data of 4 "data of" pattern decision number signal ", data of" starting opening signal ", data of" main prize ball signal ") and output data of firing permission (step S170), and the synthesized data is The information is output to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / emission permission signal (step S171).
Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S172). Thereafter, data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S173).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S174). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S176), the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prize for which the payout command has not been transmitted yet The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a winning ball command counter capable of storing information on the winning ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here 10). In the area to be used, data of winning corresponding to the winning balls not subjected to the generation processing of the main winning ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor fraudulent payments by collating these two signals.

In these winning number counter areas, the winning number counter area is set according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (three winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls in the case of this embodiment). The counter number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning on the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, while transmission may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which the payout command is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in the three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1, respectively. The three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2 are configured to be able to store up to 255 prizes.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, “0” in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number.
Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the winning balls remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining winning balls area (step S187). In addition, as the value of the remaining number area of winning balls before this processing, a fraction which does not meet a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main winning ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. If the number is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, whenever the number of remaining winning balls is ten, the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the remaining number area of the winning balls (step S191), and the process returns to the process of step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined pay area. . In addition, when the payout of the game ball such as during a big hit is concentrated by outputting the main prize ball signal, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accurate occurrence occurred during the big hit It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of winning balls can not be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

  In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194).

  The payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control, and the payout busy signal is in the on state (busy state) when the payout control can not be immediately started. Be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal makes a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (the payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay the prize ball. When in the state, it is configured to transmit a payout command. As described above, when the payout control device 200 can not immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform the useless processing by preventing the subsequent processing regarding the transmission of the payout command. We try to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  The conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy status) are, for example, during the payout operation, the ball lending operation, the shoot ball out error, the overflow error, the frame radio wave illegal occurrence, the payout ball detection switch (dispensed The number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormality of a switch for monitoring a shot ball, a shortage of payout error, a payout excess error, and the number of unpaid balls Etc) (when it is not = 0) etc.

  If the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, "0" in the winning number counter area to be checked Determine if there is a non-count number.

  Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S 197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

  If it is determined in step S195 that there is a counted number (step S195; Y), the counted number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 The payout amount command corresponding to the address of is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout amount command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms is set as an initial value, for example.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control output from the payout control means (the payout control device 200) indicates that the game control device 100 can start the payout control. In this case, the winning ball command transmitting means transmits the winning ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, since the game control apparatus 100 controls the game ball command to be transmitted based on the state signal output from the payout control apparatus 200, the award is made only when the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so when a power failure occurs, it will be backed up by the game control device 100 and backed up to the payout control device 200. Accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the function for

  In a conventional gaming machine (e.g., the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when the power is shut off due to some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before the power is shut off. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the cost increases because the function for backing up is required. According to the present invention, accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the dispensing control device 200 with a function for backup.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to an external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can pay out the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Further, since the prize ball instruction counter capable of storing information on the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing the information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball having different transmission timings Information on signals can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is generally performed, and the winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, first special fluctuation winning device 38, second) provided in the gaming area 32 The game control means (the game control device 100) which transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the special variation winning device 39), and the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command sent from the game control means The game control means is a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start the payout control. Control to transmit the winning ball command to the payout control means based on the above, and when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means The Also, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the payout control means receives a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started, and the prize signal is continuously output for a predetermined period. The ball command is to be sent to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game area 32 is provided with a plurality of winning areas with different numbers of winning balls (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, first special fluctuation winning device 38, second special fluctuation winning device 39) The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball instruction counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying presence / absence of non-transmission of a prize ball command for instructing payout control of gaming balls for each number of prize balls, When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter, the winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200) The status signal indicates whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control prior to the identification of whether or not there is any unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter. It will be.

  In addition, while overall game control is performed, to the specified winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, first special fluctuation winning device 38, second special fluctuation winning device 39) Payout control means (disbursement control means (disbursement control) for controlling the disbursement of the game balls based on the game control means (the game control device 100) for transmitting the prize ball command based on the winning of the game balls Control device 200), and the game control means indicates that the status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started A prize ball command transmitting means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when playing, and information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the gaming ball to the predetermined winning area. Including award ball communication And an external information output unit (game control apparatus 100) for outputting (main award ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, the external information output unit including a payout control unit and a status signal output from the payout control unit. Thus, the winning ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

  In addition, even if the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) generates a power failure and returns from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicates that payout control can be started. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It will be transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the award ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing information on the award ball command and the information on the award ball signal (main award ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) is provided with a predetermined winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, first). A winning ball command is generated on the basis of one winning to the special fluctuation winning device 38, the second special fluctuation winning device 39), and the winning ball command is generated, and the winning ball command indicates that the payout control can be started. The command is configured to be transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command counter (the game control device 100) can store the information of the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area. And While updating the game ball at the fixed winning area at the time of winning, and updating it in response to transmission to the winning ball command to the payout control means, the number of winning ball commands not transmitted can be stored. The external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out according to the winning of the gaming ball in the predetermined winning area, and outputs the winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the cumulative value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is capable of storing information on the prize in units of one prize in the predetermined prize area, and is updated when the gaming ball is prized in the predetermined prize area, By performing updating in accordance with the cumulative processing of the number of winning balls by the external information output means, it is possible to store the number of winning balls that have not been subjected to the cumulative processing.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 19 shows the random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number which are targets of the initial value random number update processing. In the random number updating process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).

If the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether or not the random number for the general drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).
If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number loaded corresponds The start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value (step S213). After that, it is determined whether or not the random number per block diagram is waiting for setting the next initial value (start value) (step S214).

If the hit random number in the drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the hit symbol random number in the drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).
If the random number per block is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial stage of the random number per block is loaded A value is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). After that, it is determined whether or not the hit symbol random number in the ordinary drawing is waiting for setting the next initial value (start value) (step S217).

If the hit symbol random number in the common drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended.
Also, if the hit pattern random number of the common drawing is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the next time initial value is loaded and the initial symbol random number is loaded (step S218). The initial value of the next time is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219), and the random number updating process 1 is ended.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 20 shows the random number update process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1 byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2 byte random number (variation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers, and both random update processing 2 Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, updating of 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach variation mode determination) by random number updating process 2 executed in one interrupt process for main process is performed for either upper 1 byte or lower 1 byte. Are configured to

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for specifying in order which random number of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step S231). In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Then, when the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the variation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when “1”, the variation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when “2” The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is "3", the variation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referenced based on the calculated address (step S234). In the table referred to at this time, the upper limit judgment value for each kind of random number, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random number has made a round is stored.

Subsequently, for example, the CPU used as a gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as "R register") used for refreshing DRAM etc. In addition, although the counter "M1 counter" which operates in the same manner as the R register is built in, the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). The randomness can be given randomness by using the value of the M1 counter.
Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is obtained, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). The mask value is the number of bits different depending on the random number to be updated, for example, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit value is different depending on the type of random number. When the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter is updated. When the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower order of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited thereto.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). Then, if the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S 236; Y), the value left by masking the value of the M 1 counter with the mask value as the added value Is set as a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to “masked value”, and the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S 237), and the process proceeds to step S 239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S 236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value ( The process proceeds to step S239). The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0", and adding "0" later does not change from the value before addition, so to avoid it. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2-byte) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), Go to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated as the lower 1 byte of the random value (1 A byte is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S 242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S 237 or S 238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether this new random value is larger than the upper limit judgment value acquired in step S 233 (step S243). Then, if the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; N), the new random number value is saved in a lower random number area of 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number value is taken as a new random number again (step S244). The data is saved in a lower random number area of byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number updating process 2 is ended. If the random number is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), the new random number value (when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the high-order random number area of the 2-byte random number (step S247). And the random number updating process 2 ends.
In the case of this embodiment, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, and the type information of the random number area to be updated (1-byte random number, 2-byte random number (upper), 2-byte random number (lower)) on the effect random number update table. The address of the update area, etc. is defined for the type of random number to be updated (4 blocks).

  As described above, the CPU 111A updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls to the starting winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning device 37. It is a random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 21 shows the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the winning opening switch (upper large winning opening switch 39a) in the upper large winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) is prepared (step (S301) A fraud / prize monitoring process (step S302) is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize at the upper prize port despite the upper prize port is not open and to detect a normal prize.

  In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input on the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of a fraud winning number area, a fraud win error notification command, a fraud Information on the number upper limit value (the number of irregularities judged) and the address of the winning opening switch table is defined. In addition to the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches) in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit, lower address of winning number counter area 1, winning number counter area 2 for each switch. The lower address information of is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared for each of the switches to be monitored.

  After that, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the winning opening switch (lower large winning opening switch 38a) in the lower large winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and whether there is any illegal winning The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S304) for detecting a normal prize is executed.

  Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the general electric power (normal variation winning device 37) (step S305), and monitor whether there is an incorrect winning and normal winning. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S306) to detect is performed. Then, prepare a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch which can always win (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36 and the winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35) (step S307). The winning number counter updating process (step S308) is performed to update.

Next, a state scan counter for specifying in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches whose state should be monitored and which signal is to be the target of the current monitoring is updated (step S309). In the case of the present embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.
Thereafter, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

  In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is “0”, a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like of the switch. Monitoring of the state based on the detection signal 1 is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is “2”, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is “3”, monitoring of the status based on the payout abnormality status signal is configured. Ru.

  Next, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

  In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. The monitoring of the state is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the main body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. Moreover, when the value of the state scan counter is "2", monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is It is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S314). If the value of the state scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the process proceeds to step S318. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine determines whether or not an error has occurred. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

  In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like of the switch. Monitoring of the state based on the detection signal 2 is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) is performed to check a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control, and the process proceeds to step S318. Note that the processing in steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 ms.

  Next, a V abnormal passage monitoring process (step S318) is performed to monitor detection of an abnormal input in the probability change operation area switch 38d, and a residual ball monitoring process (step S319) to monitor gaming balls remaining in the upper channel 38j. I do. Further, the discharge ball monitoring process (step S320) for monitoring the game balls remaining in the lower flow path 38k is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended.

[Incorrect & prize monitoring process]
FIG. 22 shows the fraud & prize monitoring process (steps S302, S304, and S306) in the above-described prize hole switch / state monitoring process. This fraud & prize monitoring process is performed on the lower special winning opening switch 38a of the first special variation winning device 38, the upper winning hole switch 39a of the second special variation winning device 39, and the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning device 37. It is a process to be performed. For the special winning opening (first special fluctuation winning device 38, second special fluctuation winning device 39) and the general electric power (normal fluctuation winning device 37), the opening / closing member is forcibly opened to insert the game ball and pay out the prize ball In addition to the detection of winnings, fraud monitoring is conducted because fraud is easy to perform.

  In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S 321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S 322). The fraud monitoring period is the period during which the flag for the lower prize winning opening unfair monitoring period is set when the winning prize switch to be monitored for errors is the lower prize winning mouth switch 38a, and the winning bid switch for error monitoring is If it is the upper large winning a prize opening switch 39a, it is a period during which the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag is set, and if the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, This is a period other than the state in which the release control of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is being executed.

  Then, if it is a fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S323). If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (step S323; N), the process proceeds to step S332. If there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target number of incorrect winnings is updated by +1 (step S324), and the number of updated incorrect winnings is equal to or greater than the number of monitoring targets. It is determined whether there is any (step S325).

In the case of this embodiment, regardless of the type of winning opening switch subject to error monitoring, the number of fraud determination determinations is set to five, but the number of unauthorized occurrences defines a different number for each type of winning opening switch. It can also be done.
The determination number is set to five, for example, when the big winning opening in the open state or the portable power is converted to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the big winning opening or the opening / closing member of the portable power, and the gaming ball wins This is so as not to judge that the signal is illegitimate when the player wins after the period of validity of the mouth switch or when the signal is noisy, and it is not easy to judge as an error if it is not illegitimate.

Then, if the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrences to be monitored (Step S325; N), a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (Step S330).
If the number of fraudulent prizes is equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrences to be monitored (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent prizes is limited to the number of fraudulent occurrences (step S326). (For example, 60000 ms) is saved (step S327). Next, a target fraudulent generation command is prepared (step S328), a fraudulent prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step S329), and the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step S338). ).

On the other hand, if the fraud monitoring period is not underway (step S322; N), the winning hole monitoring table of the target winning hole switch is prepared (step S330), and the winning number counter update process (step S331) for setting the winning balls If the notification timer of interest is not 0, it is updated by one (step S332). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.
Then, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S333). If the value is not 0 (step S333; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step S333; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, prepare the target fraud release command (step S334), and set the fraud winning flag as the fraud flag. Prepare (step S335). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336).

If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the present fraud & prize monitoring process, the target number of wrong prizes is cleared ( Step S337) The prepared injustice flag is compared with the value of the injustice flag area of interest (step S338).
Also, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S 336; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the incorrect flag area (step S338).

Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S 338; Y), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended.
If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S 338; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S 339), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step S340), the fraud & prize monitoring process ends. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the occurrence of an error, and an incorrect prize error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 along with the release of the error, and the start and end of the error notification are set. It will be done.

[Winning number counter update processing]
FIG. 23 shows winning number counter updating processing (steps S308 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is obtained from the winning opening monitoring table (step S 351), and whether there is an input (accurate change in input) to the target winning opening switch It determines (step S352).

If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (step S362).
If the target winning opening switch has an input (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether it overflows (step S355). When no overflow occurs (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). If an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S354, the counter for winning balls (delivery command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0-65535).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S 357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S 358), and it is determined whether the overflow occurs (step S 359). When no overflow occurs (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). It is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has ended (step S362). If an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (step S362). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main winning ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0-255).

  If monitoring of all the switches has not ended (step S362; N), the process returns to the process (step S352) of determining whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is ended. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning on the winning area, and the information on the winning is stored.

[Pachislot machine state check process]
FIG. 24 shows the gaming machine state check process (steps S311, S313, S316) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is obtained (step S371), and it is determined whether a signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

  Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table (the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the winning hole switch / state monitoring process). As this information, for example, the lower address of the head address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal Judgment data of ON, state OFF command (make error notification end command in case of error system), state ON command (make error notification start command in case of error system), state OFF monitoring timer comparison value, state ON monitoring timer Contains the comparison value.

  If the target signal is not on (step S372; N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step S373), and the state off command of the object is acquired and prepared (step S374). Thereafter, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S 375), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S 379). If the target signal is not on (step S 372: N), it is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (is normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

  On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S372; Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step S376), and the state on command of the target is acquired and prepared (step S377). Thereafter, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S378), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379). The case where the target signal is on (step S 372; Y) is a state indicating that the error signal is an error (abnormal or incorrect), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. Is a state showing

If the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the current signal (step S379; Y), that is, if the state of the signal has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382) It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383).
If the value of the target signal control area does not match the state of the current signal (step S379; N), that is, if the state of the signal changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area Step S380). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S 381), the target status monitoring timer is updated by 1 (step S 382), and it is determined whether the target status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step S383).

If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N), the gaming machine state check processing is ended.
If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and the comparison value is kept at -1 (step S384). The status flag thus compared is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S385).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S385; Y), the gaming machine state check process is ended.
If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the rendering command setting process Then (step S387), the gaming machine state check process is ended. As a result, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in step S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Discharge busy signal check process]
FIG. 25 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S317) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 can not start the payout control.

If the payout busy signal is on (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and an on determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S393), It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396).
If the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S394), and an off determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S395) It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interrupts.

If the value of the busy signal status area does not match the status of the current signal (step S396; N), save the status of the current signal in the busy signal status area (step S397), and clear the busy signal monitoring timer (Step S398), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).
If the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400). If it is not greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The payout busy signal check process ends. Also, if it is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of comparison value -1 (step S401) to prepare in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check process is ended.

  By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, and the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be influenced by

  In addition, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an undefined state until any signal state continues for the signal determination time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout control device 200 immediately outputs the winning ball command even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. And the payout ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

[V abnormal passage monitoring processing]
FIG. 26 shows the V abnormal passage monitoring process (step S318) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In the V abnormal passage monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation operation area 38h is in effect (step S411). The fact that the probability variation operation area 38h is active means that the detection of the gaming ball by the probability variation operation area switch 38d is treated as being effective (see FIG. 8). If the probability variation operation area 38h is in effect (step S411; Y), the process proceeds to step S418. If the positive variation operation area 38h is not valid (step S411; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the positive variation operation area switch (step S412).

Then, when there is no input in the probability change operation area switch (step S412; N), the process proceeds to step S418.
Further, when there is an input to the probability change operation area switch (step S412; Y), the processing regarding the occurrence of the V abnormal passage error from step S413 is performed. The probability changing operation area 38h can flow only when the lever member 38i is retracted from the probability changing operation area 38h. Then, the period during which the probability changing operation area switch 38d is effective starts when the lever member 38i is in the retracted state, and the game ball that has flowed in after the lever member 38i becomes in the state covering the probability changing operation area 38h is the probability changing operation area When a predetermined time sufficient to be detected by the switch 38d has elapsed, or when the lever member 38i is in a state of covering the positive change operation area 38h, the operation is ended. Therefore, the presence of an input to the probability change operation region switch 38d when the probability change operation region switch 38d is not effective is an abnormal state which normally does not occur, and processing regarding occurrence of a V abnormal passage error is performed.

In the processing for the V abnormal passage error generation, first, the initial value (here, a value corresponding to 60 seconds) is saved in the V abnormal passage notification timer area (step S413), and the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is an error occurring flag It is determined whether or not (step S414).
Then, if the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is an error occurring flag (step S414; Y), that is, if an error is already occurring, the V abnormal passage monitoring process is ended.

  Also, if the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is not an error occurring flag (step S 414; N), that is, if it is determined that an error occurs in the current process, the error abnormal flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag area ( Step S415), prepare a V abnormal passage generation command (step S416). Thereafter, rendering command setting processing is performed (step S417), and the V abnormal passage monitoring processing is ended. The effect control device 300 performs a process of notifying an error upon receipt of the V abnormal passage occurrence command.

On the other hand, if the process proceeds to step S418, it is determined whether the V abnormal passage notification timer is 0 (step S418).
Then, when the V abnormal passage notification timer is 0 (step S418; Y), the V abnormal passage monitoring process is ended. In this case, the V abnormal passage error is not occurring.
If the V abnormal passage notification timer is not 0 (step S418; N), the V abnormal passage notification timer is updated by 1 (step S419), and it is determined whether the V abnormal passage notification timer has become 0 (step S420). ).

If the V abnormal passage notification timer has not become 0 (step S420; N), the V abnormal passage monitoring process is ended. In this case, the notification of the V abnormal passage error continues.
When the V abnormal passage notification timer becomes 0 (step S420; Y), the normal medium flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag area (step S421), and a V abnormal passage cancellation command is prepared (step S422) . Thereafter, rendering command setting processing is performed (step S423), and the V abnormal passage monitoring processing is ended. The effect control device 300 performs processing to end the error notification in response to the reception of the V-abnormal passage cancellation command.

[Residual ball monitoring process]
FIG. 27 shows the remaining ball monitoring process (step S319) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this remaining ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the passage port switch 38g that detects gaming balls that have not flowed into the probability change operation area 38h (step S431). If there is no input to the passage port switch 38g (step S431; N), the process proceeds to step S433. If there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S431; Y), the remaining ball counter for managing the number of gaming balls in the upper channel 38j is not zero and updated by one (step S432), step S433 Migrate to

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step S433), and when there is no input (step S433; N), the process proceeds to step S435. If there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step S433; Y), the remaining ball counter for managing the number of gaming balls in the upper flow path 38j is not 0 if it is not 0 (step S434). Transfer to S435.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input on the lower large winning opening switch (step S435), and if there is no input (step S435; N), the process proceeds to step S438.
Also, if there is an input on the lower large winning opening switch (step S435; Y), the remaining ball counter for managing the number of gaming balls in the upper channel 38j is updated by +1 (step S436). The timer initial value is saved (step S437), and the process proceeds to step S438. The remaining ball monitoring timer is for determining that there is a remaining ball error when the gaming ball has stayed in the upper channel 38j for a long time. Here, as the initial value, a time sufficiently longer than the time taken to flow into the upper flow path 38 j and to be discharged without abnormality is set. In addition, since the value is updated by -1 in the following processing, it is set so that 3 seconds can be clocked by saving a value of +1 corresponding to 3 seconds as an initial value.

  Next, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step S438). If the remaining ball counter is 0 (step S438; Y), that is, there is no gaming ball in the upper channel 38j, the remaining ball is An error cancellation flag is prepared (step S444), and a residual ball error cancellation command is prepared (step S445). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step S446).

  On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step S438; N), that is, if there is a gaming ball in the upper channel 38j, it is determined whether a remaining ball error is already occurring (step S439). If the residual ball error is already occurring (step S439; Y), the residual ball monitoring process is ended. If the remaining ball error is not occurring (step S439; N), the remaining ball monitoring timer is updated by 1 (step S440), and it is determined whether the remaining ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S441).

  If the remaining ball monitoring timer is not 0 (step S441; N), the remaining ball monitoring process is ended. If the remaining ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S441; Y), a remaining ball error occurrence flag is prepared (step S442), and a remaining ball error occurrence command is prepared (step S443). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step S446).

If the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step S446; Y), the remaining ball monitoring process is ended.
If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step S446; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the remaining ball error flag area (step S447), and rendering command setting processing is performed. Then (step S448), the remaining ball monitoring process is ended. The effect control device 300 performs processing for starting an error notification based on the reception of a remaining ball error occurrence command, and performs processing for ending the error notification based on the reception of a remaining ball error cancellation command.

  That is, by the above processing, even if a predetermined time (3 seconds in this case) has elapsed from the inflow of the last gaming ball into the upper flow passage 38j, the remaining game balls are not discharged from the upper flow passage 38j. It is determined that it is a sphere error. Thus, for example, it is possible to prevent a cheating action such as making a game ball (line fishing ball) attached with a thread remain in the upper flow passage 38j.

[Emission ball monitoring process]
FIG. 28 shows the discharge ball monitoring process (step S320) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this discharge ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e that detects the game balls discharged from the lower flow passage 38k, that is, the game balls discharged from the first special variation winning device 38 (Step S451). If there is no input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S451; N), the process proceeds to step S453. If there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S451; Y), the discharge ball counter for managing the number of gaming balls in the lower flow passage 38k is not 0 if it is not 0 (step S452). Migrate to

  Next, it is determined whether there is an input to the passage port switch 38g for detecting gaming balls that have not flowed into the probability change operation area 38h (step S453), and if there is no input (step S453; N), the process proceeds to step S456 Do. Further, when there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S453; Y), the discharge ball counter managing the number of gaming balls in the lower flow passage 38k is updated by +1 (step S454). The initial value is saved (step S455), and the process proceeds to step S456.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the probability changing operation area switch 38d that detects gaming balls having flowed into the probability changing operation area 38h (step S456), and if there is no input (step S456; N), the process proceeds to step S459 .
Further, when there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step S456; Y), the discharge ball counter managing the number of gaming balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by +1 (step S457). The timer initial value is saved (step S458), and the process proceeds to step S459.

  The passage opening switch 38g and the positive change operation area switch 38d also have a function as a switch for detecting gaming balls flowing into the lower flow path 38k, and the discharge ball counter is incremented by 1 based on the detection of gaming balls with these switches. Update and save the timer initial value in the discharge ball monitoring timer area. The discharge ball monitoring timer is for determining that a discharge ball error occurs when the gaming ball has stayed in the lower flow passage 38k for a long time. Here, as the initial value, a time sufficiently longer than the time taken to flow into the lower flow path 38 k and to be discharged without abnormality is set. In addition, since the value is updated by -1 in the following processing, it is set so that 3 seconds can be clocked by saving a value of +1 corresponding to 3 seconds as an initial value.

  Next, it is determined whether the discharge ball counter is 0 (step S459). If the discharge ball counter is 0 (step S459; Y), that is, if there is no gaming ball in the lower flow path 38k, the discharge ball is An error cancellation flag is prepared (step S465), and a discharge ball error cancellation command is prepared (step S466). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step S 467).

  On the other hand, if the discharge ball counter is not 0 (step S459; N), that is, if there is a gaming ball in the lower flow path 38k, it is determined whether a discharge ball error is already occurring (step S460). Then, if the discharge ball error has already occurred (step S460; Y), the discharge ball monitoring process is ended. If the discharge ball error has not occurred (step S460; N), the discharge ball monitoring timer is updated by 1 (step S461), and it is determined whether the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S462).

  If the discharge ball monitoring timer is not 0 (step S462; N), the discharge ball monitoring process is ended. If the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S462; Y), a discharge ball error occurrence flag is prepared (step S463), and a discharge ball error generation command is prepared (step S464). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step S 467).

If the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step S 467; Y), the discharge ball monitoring process is ended.
If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step S 467; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the discharge ball error flag area (step S 468), and effect command setting processing is performed. Then (step S448), the discharge ball monitoring process is ended. The effect control device 300 performs a process of starting an error notification based on the reception of the discharge ball error occurrence command, and performs a process of ending the error notification based on the reception of the discharge ball error cancellation command.

  That is, by the above processing, even if a predetermined time (3 seconds in this case) has elapsed from the inflow of the last gaming ball to the lower flow passage 38k, all the gaming balls are not discharged from the lower flow passage 38k It is determined that it is a sphere error. Thus, for example, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent action such as making a game ball (line fishing ball) attached with a thread remain in the lower flow passage 38k.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special view game process (step S110) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special view game process, the monitoring of the input of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the control of the entire processing related to the special view variation display game, and the setting of the display of the special view are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the special view game process, first, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) is performed to monitor winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is a winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers etc.) are extracted, A game result prior determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance before the start of the figure variation display game.

Next, the upper winning prize opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the upper large winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of the game ball by the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39.
Further, the lower large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A3) is performed. In this lower large winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of gaming balls at the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38.

Thereafter, the positive change operation area switch monitoring process (step A4) is performed. In this probability change operation area switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of gaming balls in the probability change operation area switch 38d provided in the probability change operation area 38h.
Next, remaining ball processing timer update processing (step A5) is performed. In this remaining ball processing timer update processing, processing is performed to manage the special winning opening remaining ball processing time set after the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are closed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A6). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A7).
If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A7; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A8), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A9). Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the special figure game process number (step A10).

At step A10, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure variation A special drawing routine processing (step A11) is performed to set information required to perform processing.
At step A10, when the special figure game process number is "1", the special figure variation process which performs setting of the stop display time of the special figure, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A12) is performed.

  In step A10, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the big winning opening of each big hit The special chart display process (step A13) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the release pattern, set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process, and the like.

At step A10, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the opening number, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. A fanfare / interval process (step A14) is performed.
In step A10, when the special figure game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing of setting the ending command in the final round, the big winning opening survival A special winning opening open process (step A15) is performed to set information required to perform ball processing.

If the special figure game processing number is "5" in step A10, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the big hit end processing A special winning opening remaining ball process (step A16) is performed to set information necessary for the execution.
At step A10, when the special figure game process number is "6", a big hit end process (step A17) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special view 1 display 51 (step A18), the symbol variation control process (step A19) related to the special view 1 display 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A20), the symbol variation control processing (step A21) concerning the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. Thereafter, lever solenoid control processing (step A22) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed, and the special view game processing is ended.
On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" at step A7 (step A7; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A18 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36), the prize monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed. (1) It is determined whether or not there is a winning on the starting opening (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning on the first starting opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning on the first starting opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (during general public support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. . That is, if it is a time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game, a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless it is left-handed to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and does not win the right-handed driving to the second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37). Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is advantageous, but there is a win in the first starting opening during the time saving state (that is, the left hitting in the time saving state) In addition, the presentation control device 300 is configured to send a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform notification (warning) instructing to perform a right-handling operation.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the first start port (start winning port 36) (step A107), the special view start port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, prepare a second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) prize monitoring table (step A109), perform hard random number acquisition processing (step A110), and whether or not there is a winning to the second starting opening It determines (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning on the second starting opening (step A111; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the second starting opening (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37) is in operation, ie, normal fluctuation If it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which winning of the gaming ball is possible (step A112), and it is determined that the ordinary electric role is in operation (step A112; Y), It transfers to the process of A114 and performs the process after it. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary motor-operated combination is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether a common electric charge fraud is occurring (step A113).

  In the determination as to whether or not the general electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent prizes to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is equal to or more than the fraud occurrence judgment number (for example 5). In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gaming ball can not be won in the closed state, and the gaming ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the gaming ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a gaming ball winning in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent winnings. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

If it is determined in step A113 that no ordinary power transmission is occurring (step A113; N), a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). The figure starting opening switch common processing (step A115) is done, it ends starting opening switch supervision processing.
If it is determined in step A113 that a general power transmission fraud is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated further.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the hard random number acquisition process, first of all, there is no winning information on the starting opening to be monitored among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37). The setting is made (step A121), and it is determined whether there is an input to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (step A122).
Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended.
On the other hand, if there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number is extracted, the hard random number acquisition processing is ended.
When latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded and prepared in the hard random number latch register to be monitored (step A125). Then, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37), the winning presence information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), hard random number acquisition processing finish.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting port switch common processing (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. The special view starting opening switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 32, in the special view starting opening switch common process, first, information on the number of winnings on the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a Load the starting opening signal output count which is the number of outputs to the external management device (step A131), update the loaded value by +1 (step A132), and determine whether the output count overflows (step A133) ).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start aperture signal output number area of RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135.
On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by +1 updating, so that it is determined that the number of times of output overflows and is not updated.

Next, it is determined whether the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations (starting storage) corresponding to the monitored starting opening switch among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (step A135).
If the number of to-be-updated holdings to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special drawing starting opening switch common processing ends.
In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of to-be-updated special figures (number of specially-designated 1 reservations or specially-designated number 2) is updated +1 Step A136) A decoration special drawing reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special drawing reservation number is prepared (step A137), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A138).

  Next, save the target starting opening winning flag (step A139), calculate the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of starting opening switches to be monitored and the number of special drawing reservations (step A140), and prepare in step A125. The saved big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM (step A 141). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting opening switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A142), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A143).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A 144), and the address of the variation order flag storage area corresponding to the total of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number Is calculated (step A145), and the target fluctuation order flag is saved in the calculated area (step A146). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first start memory and the second start memory are digested in the generation order, and the variation order flag is stored in the 1 to 8 variation order flag storage areas corresponding to the digestion order. Alternatively, by storing the information of Special Figure 2, the start-up storage order is managed.
Thereafter, a special-graph hold information determination process (step A147) is performed to determine information on the starting memory before the start-up memory is digested, and the special-figure starting port switch common process is ended.

  Here, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 and the start winning area of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A start storage means is provided for storing a predetermined number at the upper limit as start storage. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) sets various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as the first start storage with the predetermined number as the upper limit. It stores and stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball on the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view hold information determination process (step A147) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described. The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

As shown in FIG. 33, first, a low probability determination flag is prepared in order to make a determination based on the determination value in the low probability state (step A151), and pre-read big hit determination processing is performed (step A152).
And, if the result of the pre-read big hit determination process is a big hit (step A153; Y), set the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting opening switch (step A154), and the big hit symbol prepared in step A142. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A155), and the process proceeds to step A157.
If the result of the pre-read big hit determination processing is not a big hit (step A153; N), that is, if it is a release, stop symbol information of the release is set (step A156), and the process proceeds to step A157.

  Then, the stop symbol information is saved in the symbol information area (step A157), and the prefetch stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and the stop symbol information is prepared (step A158). (Step A159). Thus, the determination result in the low probability state is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, a high probability determination flag is prepared in order to perform determination based on the determination value in the high probability state (step A160), and pre-read big hit determination processing is performed (step A161).
Then, if the result of the pre-read big hit determination process is a big hit (step A162; Y), set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting opening switch (step A163), and the big hit symbol prepared in step A142. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A164), and the process proceeds to step A166.
If the result of the pre-read big hit determination process is not a big hit (step A162; N), that is, if it is a release, stop symbol information of the release is set (step A165), and the process proceeds to step A166.

Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure height probability (high probability state) is in progress (step A166).
If the special figure height probability is in progress (step A166; Y), the stop symbol information is saved (overwritten) in the symbol information area (step A167), and the process proceeds to step A168.
Thereafter, a prefetch stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A169). Thereby, the determination result in the high probability state is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  Next, special figure information setting processing (step A170) for setting special figure information that is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and variation pattern setting process for setting a variation aspect of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A171). Thereafter, a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern of the special view fluctuation display game is prepared (step A172), and rendering command setting processing is performed. (Step A173), the special figure hold information determination process is ended. The special figure information setting process in step A170 and the variation pattern setting process in step A171 are the same as the process executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process.

  With the above process, the prefetch stop pattern command including the result of the special view change display game based on the start storage of the preread target and the read change pattern command including the information of the change pattern in the special view change display game based on the start storage It is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. In addition, the command corresponding to each of the determination result in the low probability state and the determination result in the high probability state is transmitted as the prefetch stop symbol command. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not a big hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. From the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing, for example, the decorative special view start storage display displayed on the decorative special view start storage display unit 42 of the center case 40 that can be notified to the device 300. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the related information.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning memory storage means (game control device 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained (Determine whether or not etc.) Make pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

[Pre-reading big hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the pre-reading big hit determination process (steps A152 and A161) in the above-mentioned special view suspension information determination process will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the prefetch big-hit determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step A181), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A182). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A182; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A187), and the pre-reading big hit judgment processing is ended.
If the value of the jackpot random number is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value (step A182; N), it is judged whether the judgment flag is high probability judgment (step A183).

Then, if the determination flag is the high probability determination (step A183; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step A184), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value. (Step A186).
If the determination flag is not the high probability determination (step A183; N), that is, the low probability determination flag, the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A185), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step A186).

  If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A186; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A187), and the pre-reading big hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A186; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A188), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Upper prize winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the upper prize winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, in the upper large winning a prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “4”, that is, it is being processed during the special winning opening open (step A191). ). If the special winning opening open process is being performed (step A191; Y), the process proceeds to step A193. If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A191; N), it is determined whether the value of the special drawing game processing number is "5", that is, the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (step A192).

  If the special winning opening game is being processed (step A192; Y), the process proceeds to step A193. If the special winning opening residual ball processing is not in progress (step A192; N), the upper large winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. Since the special figure game process number does not shift next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, it is possible to check the progress of the game by the special figure game process number.

  Then, it is determined whether the upper large winning opening is in operation (step A193). In operation of the upper large winning opening is a state where there is a possibility that the second special variation winning device 39 detects a winning. The possibility of detecting a prize includes a state in which the open / close door 39c is operated to open the game ball in an open state in which a game ball can be won, and also includes a predetermined period after the open state is converted to a closed state. . If the upper large winning opening is not in operation (step A193; N), the upper large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the upper large winning opening is in operation (step A193; Y), it is determined whether the upper large winning opening switch 39a has an input (step A194).

If there is no input on the upper large winning opening switch (step A194; N), the upper large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If there is an input on the upper prize winning opening switch (step A194; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A195), and effect command setting processing (step A196) is performed. Thereby, in the effect control device 300, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the winning of the second special variation winning device 39.
Then, it is determined whether the special winning opening is being processed (step A197). If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A197; N), the upper winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the special winning opening is being processed (step A 197; Y), the special winning opening count is updated by +1 (step A 198), and the special winning opening count is the upper limit (one round can be won) For example, it is determined whether the number of game balls is equal to or greater than "9" (step A199).

When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step A199; N), the upper large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
If the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the upper limit (step A199; Y), the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A200), and the upper winning prize opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the second special variation winning device 39 is closed and one round is completed.

[Secondary prize winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the lower large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A3) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, in the lower large winning a prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, it is in processing during the special winning opening open (step A201). ). When the special winning opening open process is being performed (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A203. If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special drawing game processing number is "5", that is, the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (step A202).

  If the special winning opening game is being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A203. If the special winning opening residual ball processing is not in progress (step A202; N), the lower large winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. Since the special figure game process number does not shift next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, it is possible to check the progress of the game by the special figure game process number.

  Then, it is determined whether the lower large winning opening is in operation (step A203). The lower special winning opening is in operation is a state where there is a possibility that the first special variation winning device 38 detects a winning. The possibility of detecting a prize includes a predetermined period after the open state is converted to a closed state, in addition to a state in which the open / close door 38c is operated to enable winning of the game ball. . If the lower large winning opening is not in operation (step A203; N), the lower large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the lower large winning opening is in operation (step A203; Y), it is determined whether the lower large winning opening switch 38a has an input (step A204).

If there is no input on the lower large winning opening switch (step A204; N), the lower large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. Also, when there is an input to the lower large winning opening switch (step A204; Y), a large winning opening count command is prepared (step A205), and effect command setting processing (step A206) is performed. Thereby, in the effect control device 300, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the winning of the first special variation winning device 38.
Then, it is determined whether the special winning opening is being processed (step A207). If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A207; N), the lower large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the special winning opening is being processed (step A207; Y), the special winning opening count is updated by +1 (step A208), and the special winning opening count is at the upper limit (one round can be won) For example, it is determined whether the number of game balls is equal to or greater than "9" (step A209).

When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step A209; N), the lower large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
If the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the upper limit (step A209; Y), the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A210), and the special drawing per end pointer area is hit and the end pointer value is reached. Is loaded and saved in the control pointer area during the special view (step A211), and the lower large winning a prize opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed and one round is completed.

[Probability change operation area switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the probability variation operation area switch monitoring process (step A4) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, in the probability variation operation area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation operation area 38h is active (step A221). The fact that the probability variation operation area 38h is active means that the detection of the gaming ball by the probability variation operation area switch 38d is treated as being effective (see FIG. 8). If the positive variation actuation area 38h is not active (step A221; N), the positive variation operation area switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, if the probability variation operation area 38h is valid (step A221; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch (step A222).

Then, when there is no input to the probability change operation area switch (step A222; N), the probability change operation area switch monitoring process is ended.
If the probability change operation area switch has an input (step A222; Y), a probability change operation area passing command is prepared (step A223), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A224). As a result, in the effect control device 300, effects corresponding to the game balls having flowed into the probability variation operation area 38h can be executed.

  Next, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol is a V easy symbol (step A225). The V-easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 12R positive variation, 5R positive variation, 4R positive variation. In the case of the big hit by these symbols, the lower V opening is performed, so the gaming ball will almost certainly flow into the positive change operation area 38h. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit by 5R normal or 4R normal which is not a V-easy symbol, the lower short is open, so it is rare for the game ball to flow into the probability change operation area 38h.

Then, when the big hit design is V easy design (step A225; Y), set the probability variation operation area normal passage information (step A226), save the set information in the probability variation operation area passage information region (step A228 ), End the positive change operation area switch monitoring process.
If the big hit design is not V easy design (step A225; N), set the probability variation operating area irregular passage information (step A227), save the set information in the probability variation operation area passing information area (step A229) ), End the positive change operation area switch monitoring process.

Remaining ball processing timer update processing
Next, details of the remaining ball processing timer update process (step A5) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, in the remaining ball processing timer update process, first, the large winning opening remaining ball processing timer which manages the upper large winning a prize opening remaining ball processing time which is the remaining ball processing time for the second special variation winning device 39. Is determined to be 0 (step A231).

And, if the upper large winning a prize opening residual ball processing timer is 0 (step A 231; Y), that is, the upper special winning opening residual ball processing time which is the remaining ball processing time for the second special variation winning device 39 Is transferred to step A235.
Also, if the upper large winning opening remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A 231; N), that is, during the upper large winning opening remaining ball processing time, the upper large winning opening remaining ball processing timer is updated by -1 ( Step A232) It is judged whether or not the upper large winning a prize winning hole residual ball processing timer has become 0 (step A233).

When the upper large winning a prize winning opening residual ball processing timer has not become 0 (step A233; N), it moves to step A235.
Also, when the upper large winning a prize opening residual ball processing timer becomes 0 (step A233; Y), the setting at the end of the upper large winning a prize opening residual ball processing time is performed (step A234). In the setting at the end of the large winning a prize opening residual ball processing time, set the special motorized item 1 in operation signal to OFF, clear the upper large winning a prize opening open state flag, save the flag during the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period Do.

Next, it is determined whether the lower large winning opening residual ball processing timer that manages the lower large winning opening residual ball processing time, which is the remaining ball processing time for the first special variation winning device 38, is 0 (step A235).
Then, if the lower large winning opening residual ball processing timer is not 0 (step A 235; N), that is, during the lower large winning opening residual ball processing time, the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing timer is updated by -1. (Step A236), it is determined whether the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing timer has become 0 (step A237).

If the lower large winning a prize winning slot residual ball processing timer has not become 0 (step A 237; N), the residual ball processing timer updating process is ended.
If the lower large winning opening residual ball processing timer becomes 0 (step A 237; Y), the setting at the end of the lower large winning opening residual ball processing time is performed (step A 238). In the setting at the end of the lower large winning a prize opening residual ball processing time, set the special motorized item 2 in operation signal to OFF, clear the lower large winning opening opening state flag, save the flag during the lower large winning opening fraud monitoring period Do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the lever solenoid is stopped (step A239). If the lever solenoid is stopped (step A239; Y), the remaining ball processing timer update process is ended. The fact that the lever solenoid is at rest is a state that is set when the first special variable winning prize device 38 is opened except at the first round, that is, when the lever solenoid 38 f is kept in the OFF state. In this case, since the lever solenoid 38f does not operate after the remaining ball processing time has elapsed, the process regarding the operation of the lever solenoid 38f after the elapse of the remaining ball processing time is not performed.

If the lever solenoid is not stopped (step A239; N), the remaining ball monitoring operation information is saved in the lever solenoid information area (step A240), and it is determined whether the number of remaining balls is 0 (step A242) ).
Then, if the number of remaining balls is not 0 (step A 242; N), the remaining ball processing timer updating process is ended. In this case, the remaining ball monitoring operation of the lever solenoid is maintained.

  If the number of remaining balls is 0 (step A242; Y), the lever solenoid is set at the end of the remaining ball monitoring (step A243), and the remaining ball processing timer updating process is ended. In the setting of the lever solenoid at the end of the remaining ball monitoring, the in-stop information is saved in the lever solenoid information area, and the in-stop value is saved in the control pointer of the lever solenoid control area. Further, the control timer area of the lever solenoid control area is cleared to 0.

On the other hand, if the lower large winning opening residual ball processing timer is 0 (step A235; Y), that is, if the lower large winning opening residual ball processing time has already ended, the lever solenoid is in the residual ball monitoring operation It is determined whether it is (step A241).
Then, if the lever solenoid is not in the remaining ball monitoring operation (step A241; N), the remaining ball processing timer updating process is ended.
In addition, when the lever solenoid is in the residual ball monitoring operation (step A241; Y), the process proceeds to step A242. In this case, when the number of remaining balls becomes 0 (step A242; Y), the setting of the lever solenoid at the end of the remaining ball monitoring (step A243) is performed, and the operation of the lever solenoid 38f ends.

  By the above processing, the upper large winning a prize opening remaining ball processing time and the lower large winning a prize opening remaining ball processing time are managed. The timer that manages upper large winning a prize opening residual ball processing time and lower large winning a prize opening residual ball processing time is a timer different from the special figure game processing timer in order to manage the opening time of the special variation winning device in at least special gaming state. Since there is, it is possible to manage the upper large winning a prize opening remaining ball processing time and the lower large winning a prize opening remaining ball processing time in parallel with the progress of the special gaming state. That is, while managing the opening of one of the special variation winning devices, it is possible to manage the special winning opening residual ball processing time of the other special variation winning device.

  If it is going to control an interval time and the big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing time which follows by one special figure game processing timer, with the special figure game processing timer concerned, management of the interval time after the management of the opening possible time in the round Since it will carry out and manage the big winning a prize opening remaining ball processing time after that and will manage the openable time of the next round, the time between rounds will become long. If it is going to shorten the time between rounds, it will become easy to occur that a regular winning will be treated as invalid since the big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing time will also become short. On the contrary, if the processing time for the big winning opening remaining balls is lengthened to prevent such a situation, the time between rounds becomes long and there is a problem that the digesting speed of the special game state is sacrificed.

  In addition, since the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are alternately opened, the processing time for the upper winning opening remaining ball and the lower winning opening remaining ball processing time are always secured sufficiently long. It is possible to Then, after the end of the special winning opening residual ball processing time, since the fraud monitoring period is set by the opening of the special variation winning device which has been processed for the special winning opening residual ball processing time, the special winning opening residual It is possible to prevent the occurrence of damage even if there is an act of illegally winning a game ball with respect to the special variation winning device maintaining the closed state after the end of the ball processing time.

  From the above, the variable display game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game is controlled in the gaming machine which generates the special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. The first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning that can be converted into a game control means (game control device 100), a closed state in which the game ball can not win in the special game state and an open state in which the game ball can win In the special gaming state configured with a plurality of rounds, the gaming control means includes one of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 in each round By changing the special fluctuation winning apparatus opened every round, the first special fluctuation winning apparatus 38 and the second special fluctuation winning apparatus 39 are controlled so as to be alternately opened every round Based on the end of opening in the round, it controls to start the special winning opening residual ball processing time which treats the detection of the game ball which flowed in the special fluctuation winning device which is opened in the round as normal winning, The processing time is timed by at least a timer for managing the opening time of the special variation winning device in the special game state (special pattern game processing timer).

  Therefore, since the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are alternately opened, it is possible to secure the special winning opening remaining ball processing time for the special variation winning device being closed, and the special winning opening remaining ball Since the processing time and the opening time of the special fluctuation winning device are managed independently, it is possible to appropriately manage the big winning opening residual ball processing time for the other special fluctuation winning device while one special fluctuation winning device is open, and closed. It is possible to prevent the fraudulent act against the special fluctuation winning device in the inside.

  In addition, the game control means (game control device 100), from the end of the special winning opening residual ball processing time until the special fluctuation winning device targeted for the special winning opening residual ball processing time is released It means that the winning of the special variation winning device is invalidated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent cheating in the special game state.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, the details of the special view routine process (step A11) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the special view ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the special view 1 reserve number (first start memory number) and the special figure 2 reserve number (second start memory number) are both “0”. (Step A301). The special order 1 reserve number, the special figure 2 reserve number if both are not "0" (step A301; N), that is, the special figure 1 reserve number, the special figure 2 reserve number if not at least one of the variation order flag A flag is loaded from the storage area (for the total number of reservations 1) (step A302), and it is determined whether it is a change in the special figure 1 (step A303).

  And, if the information of Special Figure 1 is stored in the case of fluctuation of Special Figure 1 (Step A 303; Y), that is, the information of Special Figure 1 is stored in the fluctuation order flag storage area (for the total number of reservations 1), A corresponding decoration special drawing reservation number command is prepared (step A304), and effect command setting processing (step A305) is performed. At this point in time, the special drawing 1 holding number is not subtracted, and a decoration special drawing holding number command corresponding to the current value of the special drawing 1 holding number-1 is prepared. And special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A306) is done, special figure normal processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the information in Special Figure 2 is not stored in the special order 1 (step A 303; N), that is, when the information in Special Figure 2 is stored in the change order flag storage area (for the total number of reservations 1), A decoration special figure reservation number command to be prepared is prepared (step A307), and a rendering command setting process (step A308) is performed. In addition, since the special figure 2 pending number is not subtracted at this time, the decoration special figure pending number command corresponding to the value of the present special figure 2 pending number -1 is prepared. And special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A309) is done, special figure normal processing ends.

  In addition, when both the special drawing 1 holding number and the special drawing 2 holding number are “0” (step A 301; Y), it is judged whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step A 310), the customer waiting demo If it has been started (step A310; Y), the process proceeds to step A314. If the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A310; N), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A311). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A312), and an effect command setting process (step A313) is performed.

  Next, set "0" relating to the special processing routine processing as the processing number (step A314), save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A315), and clear the variation symbol discrimination flag area ( Step A316). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower large winning a prize mouth fraud monitoring period flag region (step A318). The figure usually ends processing.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A306) in the special figure normal process described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 40, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321). Next, a game number command corresponding to the value of the game number area for managing the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game for changing the effect mode is prepared (step A322), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A323).

  Thereafter, a big hit flag 1 setting process (step A324) is performed to set the shift information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special view variation display game is a big hit. Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A 325) according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A326) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A327). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A328) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the first special figure fluctuation display game (Step A329) is performed.

  Next, “1” is set as the process number (step A330), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A331). Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A332), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A333). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A334), and select the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 1 indicator 51 blink period timer) in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (step A334). Here, 100 ms is set (step A335), an initial value (here 0) is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation symbol number area (step A336), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

  The initial value set in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area is 0, so that the variation indication is started from the state in which all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state in which the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state in which all the segments are turned off.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309) in the special figure normal process described above will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process to be performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the process similar to the process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. It is done as.

  As shown in FIG. 41, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341). Next, a game number command corresponding to the value of the game number area for managing the number of times of execution of the special view variation display game for changing the effect mode is prepared (step A342), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A343). Thereafter, a big hit flag 2 setting process (step A343) is performed to set the shift information and the big hit information in the big hit flag 2 for determining whether the second special view variable display game is a big hit or not.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (step A345) according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A346) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A347). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A 348) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the second special figure fluctuation display game (Step A349) is performed.

  Next, “1” is set as the process number (step A350), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A351). Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A352), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A353). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A354), and select the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 52 blink timer) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (step A354). Here, 100 ms) is set (step A355), an initial value (here 0) is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (step A356), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

  The initial value set in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area is 0, so that the variation indication is started from the state in which all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state in which the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state in which all the segments are turned off.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
FIG. 42 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A324) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A 361). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A362), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 To do (step A363). Note that “for 1 reservation” is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure 1 start storage of the earliest among the special figures 1 in the digest order. Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A364) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit.

  Then, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is a big hit (step A365; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the outlier information was saved in step A361 (step A366) ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A 364) is not a big hit (step A 365; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended while saving the shift information in the big hit flag 1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special view variation display game is one of “big hit” and “losing”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
FIG. 43 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A344) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 Step A373. In addition, “for number of reservations 1” is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure 2 start storage which is the earliest among the special figures 2 in the digest order. Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A 374) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit.

  If the determination result in the big hit determination process (step A 374) is a big hit (step A 375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the out information was saved in step A 371 (step A 376) ), And the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A 374) is not a big hit (step A 375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended while the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special view variation display game is either “big hit” or “losing”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 44 shows the big hit determination process (steps A364 and A374) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process. In the jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (step A381), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (step A382). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 387), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.
If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; N), it is determined whether the state is a high probability state (step A 383). Then, if it is in the high probability state (step A383; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set (step A384), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A386). ). If the state is not the high probability state (step A383; N), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A386) .

  If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 357), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A 388), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A325) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of reservations 1) ) And the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

Thereafter, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 1 display 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41.
Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A407). One of 12R, 5R, and 4R is set as the round number upper limit information area.
Then, the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step A408), and the process proceeds to step A411. The special winning opening open information is information defining an open pattern (see FIG. 7) in the special game state.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A409), the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area Then (Step A410), the process proceeds to Step A411. By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

Thereafter, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A411), the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A412), and effect command setting processing (step A413) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.
Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 414), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A 415). Stop symbol setting processing ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 46 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A345) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this special view 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A 431). If it is a big hit (step A 431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of reservations 1) ) And the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step A433), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired, it saves in the special figure 2 stop design number territory (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

Thereafter, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 2 display 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41.
Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437). One of 12R, 5R, and 4R is set as the round number upper limit information area.
Then, the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step A 438), and the process proceeds to step A 441. The special winning opening open information is information defining an open pattern (see FIG. 7) in the special game state.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A439), and the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area Then (Step A440), the process proceeds to Step A441. By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A441). The decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A442), and effect command setting processing (step A443) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A444), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A445). 2 Stop symbol setting processing ends.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as a variation display game based on the detection of the gaming ball at the first start winning opening (starting entry 36), and the second start winning opening (normal variation winning) The variable display game execution means is configured to execute the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the gaming ball in the device 37). In addition, the game control device 100 constitutes a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special map information setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process, special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and special figure information setting process (step A170, A326, A346) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the special view information setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the fluctuation state group selection pointer corresponding to the probability state and the stop symbol pattern number is acquired (step A452) . Note that the probability state is any one of the low probability state and the non-short state, the high probability state and the short state, the low probability state, and the short state. Further, the stop symbol pattern number is any one of 0 to 5 corresponding to each of the off symbol, 12R positive variation symbol, 5R positive variation symbol, 5R normal symbol, 4R positive variation symbol, and 4R normal symbol.

Next, it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is an out symbol (step A453), and if it is not an out symbol (step A453; N), that is, a big hit symbol, the pointer is saved in the variation group selection pointer area ( Step A455) The special drawing information setting process is ended.
In addition, when it is the off design (step A453; Y), the fluctuation group selection pointer is updated to the value which corresponds to special figure 1 reservation number and the total value of special figure 2 reservation number (step A453), fluctuation group selection pointer The pointer is saved in the area (step A455), and the special map information setting process is ended.
That is, if the result is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected without considering the number of starting memories, and if the result is an outlier, the fluctuation pattern is selected in consideration of the number of starting memories. In step A454, the variation group selection pointer is updated in consideration of which one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is to be processed and the present effect mode.

For example, when the processing mode is the special mode when the effect mode is the normal mode, the variation group is selected in consideration of the total number of pending numbers being 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 to 8 Update the pointer When the processing mode is the special mode 2 when the effect mode is the normal mode, the fluctuation group selection pointer is updated without considering the total number of pending numbers.
Then, when the processing mode is the special figure 1 when the effect mode is other than the normal mode, the variation group selection pointer is updated without considering the total number of pending numbers, and the effect mode is other than the normal mode. When the processing target is the special view 2, the fluctuation group selection pointer is updated in consideration of which of the numbers 0 to 1, 2 to 8 the total number of reservations is.
In addition, the total number of the number of holdings is 0 when the starting memory is generated and the special figure variation display game is started with no starting memory (in the customer waiting demo) and the total number of holding numbers is 1 Is a case where the special figure variation display game is started with one starting memory.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special view reserve information determination process, special view 1 change start process, and special pattern 2 change start process (steps A171, A328, A348) will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection address table is set (step A461), and the address of the fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation group selection pointer is acquired and prepared (step A462) The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of holdings 1) and prepared (step A463).

  Then, 2-byte distribution processing (step A464) is performed to acquire the address of the variation pattern selection table obtained as a result of the distribution, and prepared (step A465), and the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area Load the fluctuation pattern random number 2 from 1) and prepare (step A466). Then, distribution processing (step A 467) is performed, and the fluctuation pattern number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the fluctuation pattern number area, and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended. By this processing, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game such as the presence or absence of the reach and the type of the reach is set. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of a game, from a plurality of patterns.

[2-byte distribution process]
FIG. 49 shows 2-byte distribution processing (step A464) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting processing. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting a variation pattern selection table of the special figure variation display game from the variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the head data of the selection table (the variation group table prepared in step A 462) is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (step A 471). Here, the fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one fluctuation pattern selection table, but the fluctuation group table defines only the fluctuation pattern selection table in which the fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. (For example, in the case of a partial change group table in the case where the result is a loss), there is no need to distribute, so a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top.

Then, if the first data in the selection table (the change group table) is a code without distribution (step A 472; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (step A 477) to distribute 2 bytes. End the process.
On the other hand, when the first data in the selection table (variation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A 472; N), one distribution value defined first in the selection table (variation group table) is acquired ( Step A 473).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A 473 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A 463 (step A 474), and the calculated new randomness It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than "0" (step A475).
Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step A 475; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A 476), the process proceeds to step A 473. Do the processing. That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (variation group table) is acquired (step A 473), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A 475 to generate a new randomness. A numerical value is calculated (step A 474), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number is smaller than "0" (step A 475).

The above process is executed until it is determined in step A475 that the new random value is smaller than "0" (step A475; Y). Thereby, any one variation pattern selection table is selected from at least one variation pattern selection table defined in the selection table (variation group table).
Then, if it is determined in step A 475 that the new random value is smaller than "0" (step A 475; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A 477), 2-byte distribution processing Finish.

  The distribution process of step A 467 in the above-described fluctuation pattern setting process is the same process as the above-described two-byte distribution process. However, program instructions for calculation differ in that the size of the random number used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A 329 and A 349) in the special drawing 1 fluctuation start process and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 and 2 is cleared (step A491).
Next, a fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and fluctuation time values corresponding to fluctuation pattern numbers are acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A493). Thereafter, the variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared (step A494), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step A495).

  Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (step A 496), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (step A 497). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A 498), and the free space after the shift is cleared (step A 499). Then, the variation order flag storage area is shifted (step A500), the free space after the shift is cleared (step A501), and the variation start information setting process is ended.

  Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game. The detailed effect contents in the special figure variation display game are set. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game A variation command including information on a pattern is mentioned, and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command, the process in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A12) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the special figure variation processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is prepared as information for stopping the variation display (step A601), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A 602).
Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, 800 ms is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, and 2000 ms is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Thereafter, the processing number "2" relating to the processing during special view display is set (step A605), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A606).
Next, save the signal related to the end of fluctuation of Special Figure 1 (for example, the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation is OFF) in the test signal output data area (Step A 607), and the signal related to the end of fluctuation of Special Figure 2 (for example, special symbol 2) Save the fluctuation signal in the test signal output data area (Step A608) and set the number of times the symbol is determined to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal. A value (for example, 256 ms) is saved (step A 609).

  Thereafter, as information for controlling the first special view fluctuation display game in the special view 1 display 51, the stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop in the special view 1 display 51 is saved in the special view 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A610), as the information for controlling the second special view fluctuation display game in the special view 2 display 52, save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special view 2 display 52 in the special view 2 fluctuation control flag area (Step A611), the special figure display processing ends.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, the details of the special figure display processing (step A13) in the special figure game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 52, in the special figure display processing, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 change start process, and the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process The big hit flag 2 which is set in is loaded (step A701), and the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM are cleared (step A702).
Then, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step A703), and when it is determined that it is a big hit (step A703; Y), the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special view fluctuation display game Save the test signal for the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the item continuous operation device operating signal is ON, and the special symbol 2 signal is ON) in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A706), A round number upper limit table is set (step A 707).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A703 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit as a result of checking the big hit flag 2 (step A 703; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A 704) and it is a big hit (step A704). A704; Y), the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the feature continuous operation device operating signal ON) regarding the start of the big hit (special feature 1 big hit) of the first special figure fluctuation display game, The special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A705), and the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A707) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A 707), the round number upper limit (in the case of this embodiment, any of 12, 5 or 4) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, It saves in the round number upper limit value area of RWM (step A 708). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A709).

Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A710), and effect command setting processing (step A711) is performed.
After that, a probability information command is prepared according to the information that makes the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game a normal probability state (low probability state) (step A 712). (Step A713) is performed.
Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 1 or special view 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process (step A714) Do A715).

  Next, a signal corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). Thereafter, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A717). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special view when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the big hit fanfare time (here, 100 ms, 2500 ms or 500 ms) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 718), and fan fare / interval process transition setting processing 1 (step A 719) ) And end the processing while displaying the special map. That is, based on the game control device 100 becoming a special result in any of the first special view change display game and the second special view change display game, the first special change winning device 38 or the second special change winning The special game state generating means for generating the special game state for converting the device 39 into the open state is provided.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A704 (step A704; N), time reduction variation number update processing (step A 720) is performed to manage the period of high probability state or time saving state, and setting of production mode The special figure gaming information check process (step A 721) is performed. Next, set "0" relating to the special processing routine processing as the processing number (step A722), save the processing number in the special drawing game processing number area (step A723), and clear the variation symbol discrimination flag area ( Step A724) The special figure display processing is ended.

[Time reduction variation update process]
Next, the details of the time shortening variation number updating process (step A720) in the above-mentioned special view display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, in the time reduction variation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure time is short (in the time saving state) (step A751). When it is not during the special drawing time (step A 751: N), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended. If the special figure time is short (step A 751; Y), it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (high probability state) (step A 752). When it is not in the special figure height probability (step A 752; N), it proceeds to step A 757. If the special figure high probability is in progress (step A 752: Y), the high probability fluctuation number is updated by 1 (step A 753), and it is determined whether the high probability fluctuation number becomes “0” (step A 754) ).

  If the high probability fluctuation number is not “0” (step A 754; N), the process shifts to step A 757. Also, if the high probability fluctuation number becomes “0” (step A 754; Y), that is, if the high probability state ends in the current special feature fluctuation display game, the high probability notification flag area is cleared (step A755) The definite variation operation area passing information area is cleared (step A756), and the process goes to step A757. The information of the probability variation operation area passing information area is cleared by this processing or by turning on the power of the gaming machine.

  Next, the number of time reduction variations is updated by -1 (step A757), and it is determined whether the number of time reduction variations has become "0" (step A758). If the time reduction variation count is not “0” (step A 758; N), the time reduction variation count update process is ended. In addition, when the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes “0” (step A758; Y), that is, when the time saving state ends in the current special view fluctuation display game, a signal related to time saving end (for example, the big hit 2 signal is turned off) ) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A759).

  Next, a signal relating to the high probability & the end of the short time is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the high probability state and the short state are ended by executing the special figure variation display game the same number of times, so the number of times of high probability variation becomes zero. Also, the number of time shortening fluctuations becomes zero, and the high probability state and the time saving state are simultaneously ended. In step A760, for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, ordinary symbol 1 Set the high probability state signal to OFF. Since the ordinary drawing only changes the probability state even when the special drawing is in the high probability state, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric combination 1 open extension state signal are always off.

  Next, save the number without time saving in the gaming state display number area (step A 761), save the general drawing low probability flag in the general drawing game mode flag area (step A 762), and make special drawing in the special drawing game mode flag area. The low probability & time saving none flag is saved (step A 763). Further, save a signal (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is OFF) relating to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (step A764), and display the LED during right hitting (for example, the second gaming state display unit 77). In order to extinguish the game, the number in the left hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 765), and the time reduction variation number updating process is ended.

[Special figure game information check processing]
Next, the details of the special view gaming information check process (step A 721) in the special view display process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the special view gaming information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a no update code (step A771).
If the next mode transition information is the no update code (step A771; Y), the special figure gaming information check process is ended. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games.

  If the next mode transition information is not a no update code (step A771; N), the number of times of execution of the special view fluctuation display game until the change of the effect mode is updated by 1 (step A772). It is determined whether the number has become "0" (step A773). When the number of times of playing is not "0" (step A773; N), the special figure gaming information check process is ended. If the number of games has become "0" (step A773; Y), that is, if the effect mode is to be changed from the next special image variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774), and the next The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is acquired (step A775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A 776), the number of games in the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and saved in the game frequency area in the RWM. The next mode shift information of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the next mode shift information area in the RWM (step A779).
Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A 780), and the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A 781). Perform step A 782).

  Next, a game number command corresponding to the newly set game number is prepared (step A783), effect command setting processing (step A784) is performed, and the special view game information check processing is ended. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of giving notice of switching from before the specified number of revolutions of switching of the effect mode. As described above, by managing the effect mode in the game control apparatus 100, for example, control such as generating a specific reach can be performed only in a specific effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process 1 (step A 719) in the above-described special-image display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1, first, the processing number relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A 791), and processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A 792).

Next, a signal regarding the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 The fluctuation time reduction state signal is turned off, and the symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A793). Since the ordinary drawing only changes the probability state even when the special drawing is in the high probability state, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric combination 1 open extension state signal are always off.
Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A 794), and a number with no time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A 795). The general drawing low probability flag is saved in the area (step A796).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A 797), and the high probability notification flag is used to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 78) provided on the gaming board 30 related to the high probability state display. The area is cleared (step A798), and the special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A799).

  Next, clear the high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of the special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the high probability state to 0 (Step A800), and manage the number of the special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the short time state The time reduction variation number area is cleared to 0 (step A801). Then, the normal mode number is saved in the effect mode number area (step A802), the game number area is cleared to 0 (step A803), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A804). Thereafter, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery time transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A805). As a result, the high probability state and the short time state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained. Also, with the occurrence of the special game state, the information on the effect mode is once cleared.

  Then, save a signal (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is ON) relating to a right-handed command in the test signal output data area (step A806), and display LED during right-handing (for example, second gaming state display unit 77). In order to light up, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 807), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, details of the fanfare / in-interval process (step A14) in the above-described special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the fanfare / interval processing, it is first determined whether it is the start of the odd round which is the round for opening the first special variation winning device 38 (step A851). (Step A 851; N), that is, in the case of an even round of opening the second special variation winning device 39, the process proceeds to Step A 853. If it is the start of the odd round (step A 851; Y), it is determined whether the remaining ball counter that manages the number of gaming balls remaining in the upper channel 38 j of the first special variation winning device 38 is 0 ( Step A 852).

  If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A852; N), the processing is ended during fanfare / interval. That is, when the game ball is left in the upper channel 38j, when the first special variation winning device 38 is opened, the remaining ball may flow into the probability change operation area 38h. In particular, since the gaming balls are likely to flow into the probability variation operation area 38 h immediately after the first special variation winning device 38 is opened, the possibility of being in a high probability state is very high. Therefore, when there is a remaining ball in the upper flow passage 38j, that is, when there is a game ball which may flow into the probability changing operation area 38h forming a specific area in the first special change winning device 38, the probability change It is arranged to wait for the start of the round for opening the first special fluctuation winning device 38 until it is confirmed that there is no gaming ball which may flow into the operation area 38h. In the case of an even round opening the second special variation winning device 39, the round is started regardless of the presence or absence of the gaming ball in the second special variation winning device 39.

When the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A 852; Y), the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A 853), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A). A 854) Perform rendering command setting processing (step A 855).
Thereafter, a special winning opening opening table is set (step A 856), and special winning opening opening information and large winning opening opening data corresponding to the number of rounds are obtained and saved (step A 857). The special winning opening open data is data indicating which one of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 is to be opened, and an opening mode such as an opening time.

  Then, the current round number in the special gaming state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value area of RWM to determine whether the current round is the final round (step A 858), and the final round If it is (step A 858; Y), the process proceeds to step A 863. If it is not the final round (step A 858; N), it is determined whether it is a lever solenoid operation round (step A 859). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member 38i, and in the case of this embodiment, it is only a specific round of the first round.

  If it is the lever solenoid operation round (step A 859; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step A 860), and the process proceeds to step A 863. Thus, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared.

  If it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step A 859; N), it is determined whether it is the start of the odd round (step A 861). If it is not the start of the odd round (step A 861; N), the process proceeds to step A 863 . In this case, the second special variation winning device 39 is opened. If it is the start of the odd round (step A861; Y), stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step A862), and the process proceeds to step A863. In this case, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened but the lever solenoid 38f is not operated.

  Thereafter, the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the special winning opening opening data is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A863), and the hit start pointer value corresponding to the special winning opening opening data is acquired Save to the control pointer area (step A864). Further, the hit end pointer value corresponding to the special winning opening open data is acquired and saved in the end point area of the special drawing hit (step A864), and it is determined whether it is the start of the odd round (step A865).

  Then, if it is not the start of the odd round (step A865; N), the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing 1 is performed (step A868), and the fanfare / interval middle processing is ended. If it is the start of the odd round (step A865; Y), the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing 2 is performed (step A868), and the fanfare / interval middle processing is ended.

  In step A852, it is confirmed whether the remaining ball counter is 0. In addition to this, it is confirmed whether the discharged ball counter is 0. If it is not 0, the processing after step A853 is not performed. You may That is, the round may be started after it is confirmed that all the gaming balls in the first special variation winning device 38 have been discharged.

  From the above, the variable display game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game is controlled in the gaming machine which generates the special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. It is possible to convert the game control means (game control device 100), the closed state where the game ball can not win in the special game state and the open state where the game ball can win, and the specific area where the game ball can flow into The first special variation winning device 38 having the probability change operation area 38h), the closed state in which the gaming ball can not win in the special gaming state, and the open state in which the gaming ball can win in the winning state; (2) The special variation winning device 39, The gaming control means is based on the fact that the gaming ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 flows into the specific area, from the case where the gaming ball does not flow into the specific area It is possible to generate a gaming state advantageous to the player after the end of the special gaming state, and in the special gaming state constituted by a plurality of rounds, in each round, the first special fluctuation winning device 38 and the second special fluctuation winning device 39 The first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are controlled so as to be alternately opened every round by changing one of the two special variation winning devices which are opened every round. Until the round of opening the first special variation winning device 38 is started, it is confirmed that there is no gaming ball which may flow into the specific area in the first special variation winning device 38 It will be waiting for the start of the round.

  Therefore, since it waits for the start of the round which opens the first special variation winning device 38 until it is confirmed that there is no gaming ball which may flow into the specific area, fairness of the game can be secured. .

  In addition, when the game control means (game control device 100) starts the round for opening the second special variation winning device 39, is all the gaming balls flowing into the second special variation winning device 39 discharged? The round is to be started regardless of whether or not it is. Therefore, when the second special variation winning device 39 not having the specific area is opened, it is opened even without confirmation of the discharge, so that the special gaming state can be quickly digested.

  Further, it may be determined in step A 851 whether the start of the specific round is to be made, and it may be confirmed whether the remaining ball counter is 0 only in the case of the start of the specific round. That is, a game control means for controlling a game in a game machine which executes a variable display game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. (Play control device 100), a special game state can be converted to a closed state where the game ball can not win a prize and an open state where the game ball can win a prize, and a specific area (probable change operation area) where the game ball can flow into 38h) A first special variation winning device 38, a second special variation that can be converted into a closed state where the gaming ball can not win a prize in the special gaming state and an open state where the gaming ball can win a prize, and does not have a specific area The game control means is provided with a winning device 39, and based on the fact that the gaming ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 flows into the specific area, the game is played more than when the gaming ball does not flow into the specific area Can be generated after the end of the special gaming state, in the special gaming state consisting of a plurality of rounds, in each round the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 By controlling one of the first special variation winning apparatus 38 and the second special variation winning apparatus 39 alternately by opening one of them and changing the special variation winning apparatus to be opened every round. In the special gaming state, the first special variation winning device 38 is controlled to be executed a plurality of rounds, and the first special variation winning device 38 is opened in a specific round of the first round. It is configured to determine whether the gaming ball having flowed into the special fluctuation winning device 38 has flowed into the specific area, and when starting the specific round, the first special fluctuation is entered. The game balls that may be flowing into the specific region in the device 38 is not present may be waiting for the start of the specific round until acknowledged. By doing this, since the start of the specific round is waited until it is confirmed that there is no gaming ball that may flow into the specific area, fairness of the game can be secured.

  Furthermore, it is determined in step A 851 whether it is a round to open the first special variation winning device 38 following the start of a specific round or a specific round, and is the remaining ball counter 0 only if it is the start of these rounds? You may make it confirm. That is, when the game control means (game control device 100) starts the round for opening the first special variation winning device 38 after the specific round, the specific area (probability change operation in the first special variation winning device 38) The start of the round may be waited until it is confirmed that there is no gaming ball which may flow into the area 38h). In this way, since it waits until it is determined whether or not the gaming ball which has flowed in the specific round has flowed into the specific area, it is possible to secure the fairness of the game.

  Further, when the remaining ball counter is not 0, the start of the round is waited, but when the remaining ball counter is not 0, the start of the special game state may be kept waiting. That is, the game control means (game control device 100) does not have a game ball which may flow into the specific area in the first special fluctuation winning device 38 when the result of the fluctuation display game is a special result. It may be possible to wait for the start of the special game state until it is confirmed. Therefore, the first special variation winning device 38 is not opened until it is confirmed that there is no gaming ball which may flow into the specific area, and the fairness of the game can be secured.

  In addition, when it is determined that the remaining ball counter is not 0 at the start of the round for opening the first special variation winning apparatus 38 other than the specific round, the second special variation winning apparatus 39 is opened in the relevant round. Also good. Also, if the specific round is a round other than the first round and the remaining ball counter is not 0 at the start of the round for opening the first special variation winning prize apparatus 38 (it may be only at the start of the specific round) A plurality of consecutive rounds immediately before the specific round may be a round of opening the second special variation winning device 39, as waiting for the start. By doing this, a sufficient time can be secured before the start of a specific round, and the remaining balls can be reliably discharged. Furthermore, a plurality of successive rounds immediately after the specific round may be a round in which the second special variation winning device 39 is opened.

[In process opening setting process 1 during the big winning opening open]
FIG. 57 shows the process transition setting process 1 (step A868) during the opening of the special winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number is set to "4" for the special winning opening opening processing (step A871), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A 872).
Thereafter, the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A 873), and a signal related to the opening start of the upper large winning opening ) In the test signal output data area (step A874).

Then, the upper winning prize opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A875), and the upper winning prize opening operating information is saved in the upper winning prize opening status flag area (step A876).
Next, clear the upper prize winning opening illegal prize number area to 0 (step A 877), save the fraud monitoring out-of-time flag in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A 878), The processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A879), and the special winning opening open processing transition processing setting processing 1 is ended.

[In process opening setting process 2 during the big winning opening open]
FIG. 58 shows the process setting process 2 (step A869) during the opening of the special winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In the special winning opening open processing transition setting process 2, first, the processing number is set to "4" for the special winning opening opening processing (step A881), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A 882).
Then, clear the information of the large winning a prize opening count number territory which remembers the winning a prize number to the special winning a prize opening (step A883), the signal regarding opening opening of the lower large winning a prize mouth (for example ) In the test signal output data area (step A884).

The lower winning prize on data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step A885), and the information on the lower winning prize opening is saved in the lower winning prize state flag area (step A886).
Next, the lower prize winning opening incorrect winning number area is cleared to 0 (step A 887), and the fraud monitoring out-of-time flag is saved in the lower big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A 888). The processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A889), and the special winning opening open processing transition processing setting processing 2 is ended.

[Big winning opening open processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening open process (step A15) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the special winning opening open process, first, it is determined whether the special winning opening open data has a pattern to be opened and closed (step A901). The pattern to be opened and closed is an open pattern which is opened and closed in one round, and in the present embodiment, the lower V is opened (see FIG. 8).
If the special winning opening open data is a pattern that opens and closes (step A901; Y), the special pointer is loaded and prepared for the control pointer (step A902), and the loaded value is equal to or higher than the end pointer value for special figure. It is determined whether there is any (step A903).

  Then, if the loaded value is not equal to or more than the value of the end pointer per special drawing (step A 903; N), that is, if the opening and closing operation is still performed in the round currently being executed, the value of the control pointer area during special drawing is +1 The update process is performed (step A904), the big hit operation shift setting process is performed (step A905), and the big winning opening open processing is ended.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the big hit operation shift setting process, the branch process by the control pointer is performed during the special figure (step A921).
If the value of the control pointer is 0 during the special drawing, the wait time (here, 2700 ms) is saved in the special drawing game processing timer area (step A 922), and the first special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed. The lower winning prize off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step A923), and the big hit operation shift setting processing is ended.

  If the value of the control pointer is 1 during the special drawing, the big hit V second half open time (here 25000 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 924), and the first special fluctuation winning device 38 In order to set it in the open state, the lower big winning opening on data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step A 925), and the big hit operation shift setting processing is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 59, if the special winning opening open data is not a pattern to open and close (step A901; N) or if the loaded value is equal to or more than the value of the end pointer per special drawing (step A903; Y), It is determined whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special gaming state with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value area of RWM (step A 906).

  Then, if it is not the final round (step A 906; N), save the special winning opening open data and the interval time (here, 300 ms, 900 ms or 1300 ms) corresponding to the number of rounds in the special figure game processing timer area ( Step A907) Prepare an interval command (step A908), and perform rendering command setting processing (step A909). Further, the process number is set to “3” for the fanfare / interval process (step A 910), and the process proceeds to step A 915.

  Also, if it is the final round (step A906; Y), save the remaining ball processing time (here, either 1300 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening open data in the special figure game processing timer area (step A911) ), Prepare an ending command (step A912), and perform effect command setting processing (step A913). Further, the processing number is set to “5” for the special winning opening residual ball processing (step A 914), and the process proceeds to step A 915.

  Then, the special winning opening residual ball processing time corresponding to the special winning opening opening data and the number of rounds is saved in the special winning opening residual ball processing timer area (step A915). In this process, when the round to be ended is a round for opening the first special variation winning device 38, the initial value of the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing time is saved in the lower large winning opening remaining ball processing timer area. Also, if the round to be ended is a round for opening the second special variation winning device 39, the initial value of the upper large winning opening remaining ball processing time is saved in the upper large winning opening remaining ball processing timer area.

  After that, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A 916), and the second large floating winning apparatus 38 is opened or closed 38c or the second special floating winning apparatus 39 is closed. The off data for turning off the winning opening solenoid 38 b and the large winning opening solenoid 39 b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step A 917), and the special winning opening open processing is ended. In step A916, the off data of lower large winning opening solenoid 38b and upper large winning opening solenoid 39b is set, but only the off data of large winning opening solenoid of the special fluctuation winning device during opening is set. You may do so.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A16) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 61, in the special winning opening residual ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter managing the number of gaming balls remaining in the upper flow passage 38j of the first special variation winning device 38 is 0 ( Step A951) If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A951; N), the special winning opening remaining ball processing is ended. In other words, the special game state is prevented from ending from the special winning opening residual ball processing until all the gaming balls in the upper channel 38j of the first special variation winning device 38 are discharged.

  When the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A 951: Y), “6” is set as the process number related to the big hit end process (step A 952), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area ( Step A953). Thereafter, an ending time (here, 100 ms, 2300 ms or 2700 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening data is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 954).

  Next, clear the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (step A 955), clear the information on the round number area storing the round number of the special gaming state (step A 956) ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number of the special gaming state (step A 957). Then, clear the information of the special winning opening opening information area storing the opening information determination flag of the special winning opening (step A 956), clear the control pointer area during special drawing (step A 957), and hit special drawing The end pointer area is cleared (step A958), and the special winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

  From the above, when the game control means (game control device 100) ends the special game state, the game having the possibility of flowing into the specific area (probability change operation area 38h) in the first special variation winning device 38 This means that the special gaming state is not ended until it is confirmed that there is no ball. Therefore, the game ball can be prevented from remaining until the next special game state, and fairness of the game can be secured. In step A951, it is confirmed whether the remaining ball counter is 0. In addition to this, it is confirmed whether the discharged ball counter is 0. If it is not 0, the processing after step A952 is not performed. It is good. That is, the special gaming state may be ended after it is confirmed that all the gaming balls in the first special variation winning device 38 have been discharged.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit end process (step A17) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in this big hit end processing, first, the flag is loaded from the special view game mode flag save area (step A1001), and the special game state of this time is based on hit in high probability & time reduction It is determined whether or not (step A1002).
If the special game state this time is not based on the high probability & time-based hit (step A1002; N), it is determined whether the jackpot symbol is the V easy symbol (step A1003). The V-easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 12R positive variation, 5R positive variation, 4R positive variation.

If the big hit symbol is not a V easy symbol (step A1003; N), prepare information of the time saving mode B start as an effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1004), and shift to step A1006.
In addition, if the special game state this time is based on hitting with high probability & short time (step A1002; Y), or if the big hit symbol is V easy symbol (step A1003; Y), the special game Information on the start of the short time mode A is prepared as an effect mode after the end of the state (step A1005), and the process proceeds to step A1006.

Then, it is determined whether there is a probability variation operation area passing information set when the gaming ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h (step A1006).
When there is no probability change operation area passage information (step A1006; N), the big hit end setting process 1 is performed (step A1007), and the process proceeds to step A1010. In this case, the high probability state is not reached.
In addition, when there is a definite change operation area passage information (step A1006; Y), big hit end setting processing 2 is done (step A1008), the information which is prepared as the production mode after the end of special game state ST mode (ST mode A Or B) (step A1009), and the process proceeds to step A1010. In this case, there is a high probability state. That is, regardless of the jackpot symbol, when the gaming ball flows into the probability change operation area 38h, a high probability state is obtained.

  Thereafter, a presentation mode information address table is set (step A1010), and the address of the table corresponding to the prepared information is acquired (step A1011). Then, from these pieces of information, the effect mode number of the effect mode after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved (step A1012), and the number of times of the effect mode after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved (step A1013) The next mode transition information of the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved (step A1014). Further, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1015), and the command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1016).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation operation area irregular passage which is the inflow of gaming balls to the probability variation operation area 38h in the special gaming state based on the jackpot symbol which is not the V easy symbol (step A1017). Then, when it is not the definite variation operation area irregular passage (step A1017; N), it proceeds to step A1019. If the probability variation operation area is irregularly passed (step A1017; Y), the irregular probability variation information is added to the probability information command (step A1018), and the process proceeds to step A1019. Then, rendering command setting processing is performed (step A1019), and the probability information command is transmitted to the rendering control apparatus 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, there are a plurality of commands including information of the rendering mode in either “high probability / time short” or “low probability / time short”, and the probability variation operation area irregular pass In the case of, irregular probability information is added.
Then, a game number command corresponding to the game number is prepared (step A1020), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step A1021).

Next, “0” is set as the process number relating to the special figure routine process (step A 1022), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A 1023).
After that, save the signal regarding the end of the big hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal OFF, big hit 3 signal OFF, big hit 4 signal OFF) in the external information output data area (step A 1024), The condition device operating signal is turned off, the character continuous operation device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1025).

  Subsequently, the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1026), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step A1027). A flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1028). Then, the information of the probability variation operation area passage information area is cleared (step A1029), the information of the special view game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1030), and the big hit end process is ended.

  If the special game state this time is based on the high probability state or the short time state, the ST mode may be set as the effect mode regardless of the presence or absence of the probability variation operation area passing information. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the big hit in the first special view variation display game, it becomes the V easy symbol with a predetermined probability, and when it becomes the big hit in the second special figure variation display game, it is all the V easy symbols and Become. In the high probability state or the time saving state, the game is progressed by right-handing, so basically only the second special view fluctuation display game is executed, all the big hit in the high probability state or the time saving state is V easy symbol It should be However, in the case of big hit in the first special view variation display game based on the first starting memory that was present at the time of big hit occurrence, despite the high probability state or time saving state does not become V easy symbol at a predetermined ratio Sometimes.

  A player who is not familiar with the contents of the game may understand that all the big hits in the high probability state or in the time saving state will be the V-easiness symbol, and there is a possibility that they may have a distrust of not becoming the ST mode. In the case of a big hit during the high probability state or during the short time state, it is possible to prevent such disbelief by transitioning to the ST mode. In addition, even if ST mode is a high probability state, it ends without generating a big hit at a predetermined rate, so even if it is ST mode in a low probability state, big hit does not occur in the ST mode. Does not occur.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 63 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1007) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process. In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of short time (for example, the big hit 2 signal is ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1041). Since the signal regarding the start of the short time is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner.
Next, a signal related to the start of low probability & short time (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 fluctuation The time reduction state signal is ON, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1042).

  Next, save the time-saving number in the game state display number area (step A1043), save the common drawing high probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A1044), and select the special drawing game mode flag area. The low probability & time saving flag is saved (step A1045). Thereafter, the high probability change frequency area is cleared to 0 (step A1046), the initial value (here, 100 times) is saved in the time reduction change frequency area (step A1047), and the big hit end setting process 1 is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 64 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1008) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process. In the big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of a short time (for example, the big hit 2 signal is ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1051). Since the signal regarding the start of the short time is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner.
Then, a signal related to the start of high probability & short time (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time The shortening status signal is ON, and the normal symbol 1 high probability status signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1052).

  Next, save the number with time reduction in the gaming state display number area (step A1053), save the general drawing high probability flag in the general drawing game mode flag area (step A1054), and save the special drawing game mode flag area. The drawing height probability & time saving flag are saved (step A1055). After that, save the initial value (100 times here) in the high probability change frequency area (step A1056), save the initial value (100 times here) in the time shortening change frequency area (step A1057), and set the big hit end End processing 2. In addition, while progressing the game by right hitting during the time saving state, since it is instructed to hit the right from the special gaming state, in the big hit end setting processing 1 and 2 the setting regarding instructing the right hitting is performed Absent.

That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms a specific gaming state generation means capable of generating a specific gaming state (time reduction state) over a predetermined period determined in advance after the end of the special gaming state. And in the specific gaming state, while controlling the operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 so that the winning of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is easier than when it is not the specific gaming state, than when not in the specific gaming state The first special view variation display game, the second special view variation display game, and the common view variation display game are configured to be reduced in variation time.
In addition, the game control apparatus 100 forms high probability state generation means capable of generating a high probability state (probability change state) over a predetermined period determined in advance after the end of the special game state.

[Lever solenoid control process]
Next, details of the lever solenoid control process (step A22) during the special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, in the lever solenoid control process, it is determined first whether the lever solenoid control pointer is a no update code (here, -1) (step A1101). If the lever solenoid control pointer is a no update code (step A1101; Y), the lever solenoid control process is ended. If the lever solenoid control pointer is not a no update code (step A1101; N), the lever solenoid control timer is updated by -1 (step A1102), and it is determined whether the lever solenoid control timer becomes 0 (step A1103) .

  If the lever solenoid control timer has not become 0 (step A1103; N), the lever solenoid control process ends. If the lever solenoid control timer becomes 0 (step A1103; Y), the lever solenoid control table is set (step A1104), and the table address corresponding to the lever solenoid control pointer is calculated (step A1105). The control pointer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control point area (step A1107), and the output data for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid output data area (step A1108). Thereafter, the probability variation operation region validity determination flag is acquired and saved in the probability variation operation region validity determination flag region (step A1109), and the lever solenoid control process is ended.

  By the above process, the lever solenoid control pointer is sequentially updated each time a predetermined time elapses, and as shown in FIGS. 8C and 8D, ON and OFF of the lever solenoid 38f are set, and the positive change operation area The switch 38d is set to be valid or invalid. When the operation of the lever solenoid is ended by satisfying a predetermined condition, by setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the positive change operation area switch 38d is invalidated. Then, after 0 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer, -1 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the state in which the operation is stopped continues.

[Processing command setting process]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 66, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2001).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), the command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process for reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2004).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), the command data (ACTION) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process is ended. The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as "command setting process".

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 67 shows the symbol variation control process (steps A19 and A21) in the special figure game process described above, and the symbol variation control process (step B15) in the standard game game process described later. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol (the first special figure, the second special figure, etc.) or the ordinary symbol (the common figure) and setting the display data of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol.

  In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag applied to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the common figure) is changing (step A2101) . In the case of this embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 (in the fluctuation control table prepared in step A18, step A20 and step B14 The address for stop) and the address for display table 1 (for variation) are defined.

If the fluctuation flag pertaining to the symbol to be controlled is fluctuating (step A2102; Y), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2103). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A18, step A20 and step B14.
Next, the blinking control timer to be controlled is updated by -1 (step A2104), and it is determined whether the updated blinking control timer is "0" (step A2105), and the updated blinking control timer is "0". If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  When the updated blink control timer is “0” (step A2105; Y), the blink control timer initial value (100 ms in this case) corresponding to the target blink control timer area is saved (step A2106), The variation symbol number of the control object is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area of the control object is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area provided in the RAM 111C (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the changing flag concerning the symbol to be controlled is not changing (step A2102; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2109). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A18, step A20 and step B14. Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

[Puppet game processing]
Next, details of the common-play game process (step S111) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the common drawing game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 34a, control of the entire processing concerning the common drawing variation display game, setting of display of common drawing, and the like are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 68, in the common-play game processing, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general competition winning switch for monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the common-play game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the common drawing game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the common drawing game processing timer is "0" (step B4).

  If it is determined that the value of the common-play game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, it is determined that the time-up or time-up has already occurred, reference is made to branch to the processing corresponding to the common-play game processing number The routine drawing game sequence branch table is set in the register (step B5), and the table is used to obtain the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the regular drawing game process number (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the common drawing game process number (step B7).

In step B7, when the popular drawing game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the common drawing fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of fluctuation start of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, the common drawing fluctuation The ordinary drawing process (step B8) is performed to set information necessary for performing the process.
If the drawing game processing number is “1” in step B7, a drawing change processing (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the drawing display processing.

In addition, if the result of the common drawing variation display game is a hit when the common drawing game processing number is "2" in step B7, the setting of the common charge open time according to whether or not the time saving state is being performed. In addition, the general drawing display processing (step B10) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common processing per processing.
In addition, if the common drawing game processing number is "3" in step B7, then the common drawing is continued during the common drawing, or the common drawing is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common electric residual ball processing, etc. A process (step B11) is performed.

In step B7, if the common drawing game process number is "4", general electric remaining ball processing (step B12) is performed to set information required for performing the common drawing end processing.
If the drawing game processing number is "5" in step B7, the drawing drawing end processing (step B13) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the drawing common processing.

Thereafter, after preparing a common drawing fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuation of the normal symbol by the common drawing display 74 (step B14), symbol fluctuation control processing relating to control of fluctuation of the normal symbol by the common drawing display 74 ( Step B15) is performed to end the common-play game processing.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B4 that the value of the common-play game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described common game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101).
Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state (for example, during a big hit, during a special view time (under normal charge support)) is hit (step B102) .

When it is a game state to hit the right (step B102; Y), it is determined whether the common drawing reservation number is obtained and the general drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105).
If the game state is not right-handed (step B102; N), a left-handed command is prepared (step B103), and the rendering command setting process (step B104) is performed, and then the common drawing reserve number is acquired. It is determined whether the number of general drawing reservations is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105).

  If the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the common drawing reservation number is updated by 1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated common drawing reservation number is calculated. (Step B107). Then, the random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (step B108), and the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit symbol random number storage area (step B109). Finish.

  If it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or if it is determined in step B105 that the number of general drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (step B105; N), End the gate switch monitoring process.

[Puden prize winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the common prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described common drawing game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the general competition winning switch monitoring process, first, whether it is hitting a common drawing, that is, the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 opens a predetermined number of times. Is determined (step B201).
Then, if the drawing is in the middle (step B201; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202) and there is an input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y) If it is determined, the count number of the common charge counter is updated by 1 (step B203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated common charge counter is the upper limit value (for example, "6") or more (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is the upper limit value or more (step B204; Y) Then, the hit end pointer value (here, 4 or 7) is loaded from the end pointer area per common drawing and saved in the middle control pointer area per common drawing (step B205). Then, the common drawing game processing timer is cleared to 0 (step B206), and the common electric winning switch monitor processing ends. That is, when there is a routine power prize higher than the upper limit value in the hit state of the common drawing, the hit state of the common drawing is ended halfway at that point.

  If it is determined in step B201 that a per figure drawing is not in progress (step B201; N), if it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. When it is determined that the common charge count number is not the upper limit value or more (step B204; N), the common match winning switch monitoring process is ended.

[Normal figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing (step B8) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 71, in the ordinary drawing routine processing, first, it is determined whether the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B301), and the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B301; Y ) Sets “0” as a process number for shifting to the ordinary drawing normal process (step B 322), and saves the process number in the ordinary drawing game process number area (step B 323). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the routine drawing routine processing is ended.

  Also, when the common drawing reservation number is not "0" (step B301; N), random numbers are loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for the hold number 1), and the hit symbol random number storage area (for the hold number 1) The hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B302). Next, it is determined whether the probability that the hit result will be hit in the spread map variation display game is in the spread map high probability that is higher than the normal probability (that is, the spread map low probability), that is, it is in the time saving state. (Step B303).

If the common drawing high probability is not (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the common drawing low probability is set (step B304), and the common drawing high probability is in progress (step B303) ; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the drawing high probability (step B305).
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306), and if the value of the random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306; Y), that is, if it is out of order, step B308. Migrate to

If the value of the per-random number is not greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B306; N), it is determined whether the per-random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307).
If the value of the random number per hit is less than the lower limit judgment value (step B307; Y), that is, if it is a loss, the shift information is saved in the hit flag area (step B308), and a lost stop symbol number is set (step B309). ), The off symbol information is saved in the common figure stop symbol information area (step B310), and the stop symbol number is saved in the common figure stop symbol area (step B314).

  On the other hand, if the value of the random number is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), that is, if it is a hit, save the hit information in the hit flag area (step B311). The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the hit symbol random number loaded in B302 is set (step B312), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B313), and the stop symbol The number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol area (step B314). In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are two types of hit symbols: an open pattern 1 as a hit symbol; a hit symbol 1 and an open pattern 2;

  In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at low probability is 0/251, the probability of hitting at high probability is 250/251, the upper judgment value is “251”, and the low probability judgment value is “251”, the high probability lower limit judgment value is “1”. Therefore, at the time of the general drawing low probability, the value of the hit random number deviates in all cases of “0” to “250”. Further, at the time of the drawing normal probability, the case where the value of the hit random number is any of “1” to “250” is present, and the case where the value of the hit random number is “0” is not.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the common figure stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
Thereafter, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the common drawing reserve number is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, with the common drawing variation display game regarding the oldest common drawing reservation number 1 being executed, the processing of raising the positions of the common drawing reservation numbers 2 to 4 held by the common drawing reservation number 1 or later one by one I do. As a result of this processing, the values for the number of general drawing reservations 2 to from the number of general drawing reservations 4 for the random number storage area per common drawing move from the number 1 for general drawing reservations for the random number storage area to the number 3 for general drawing reservation It will be done. Then, the value for the common drawing reservation number 4 of the random number storage area per common drawing is cleared, and the common drawing reservation number is decremented by one.

Next, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), and the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is set and saved in the common game processing timer area (step B320). Here, as the fluctuation time, 500 ms is selected at 200/256, 1500 ms is selected at 40/256, and 3000 ms is selected at 16/256.
Thereafter, the processing for setting transition to normal processing is set (step B 321), and the normal processing is ended.

[Processing setting setting process during general drawing fluctuation]
FIG. 72 shows the processing shift setting processing during common drawing fluctuation in the above-mentioned common drawing routine processing (step B321). In this common drawing fluctuating process transition setting process, first, “1” is set as a processing number for shifting to the common drawing fluctuating process (step B 341), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area ( Step B342).
Thereafter, a signal relating to the start of the common drawing variation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B343) to indicate that the common drawing variation display game is changing. The floating flag is saved in the common drawing fluctuation control flag area (step B344).

  Then, save the blinking control timer initial value (100 ms here), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the common drawing indicator 74, in the common drawing blinking control timer area (step B345). The value (here, 0) is saved (step B346), and the processing transition setting processing during common drawing is ended.

[During processing of common map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general drawing fluctuation processing (step B9) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, in the general drawing variation processing, first, the processing number is set to "2" as the setting processing for shifting to the general drawing display processing (step B411), and the processing number is the common drawing game processing number It saves in the area (step B412).
Thereafter, the common drawing display time (for example, 600 ms), which is the display time of the common drawing fluctuation display game result in the common drawing display 74, is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B413). Save the signal (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation in progress signal OFF) in the test signal output data area (step B414) and set the stop flag to indicate that the common drawing fluctuation display game is stopped into the common drawing fluctuation control flag area After saving (step B 415), the general drawing variation processing ends.

[Process while displaying a common map]
Next, details of the common drawing display processing (step B10) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the processing of displaying the common drawing, first, the hit flag (hit information or out information) set in the common processing is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503)

  If the hit flag is not hit information (step B 503; N), “0” is set as the process number for shifting to the ordinary drawing normal process (step B 515), and the process number is saved in the ordinary drawing game process number area (Step B516). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the processing during the routine drawing display is ended.

  On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B504), and the hit start pointer value (here 0 and 5) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information (1) is saved and saved in the control pointer area during the drawing (step B505). Next, the hit end pointer value (here, either 4 or 7) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the common drawing end pointer area (step B506), corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information The common program release time (in this case, either 1700 ms or 2600 ms) is acquired and saved in the common game processing timer area (step B507).

Thereafter, "3" is set as the process number for shifting to the process during the common drawing (step B508), and the process number is saved in the common drawing game process number area (step B509). After that, a signal related to the start per common figure (for example, the signal during medium power per symbol normally ON) and a signal related to the start of power operation (for example, the signal during normal motorized symbol 1 operation ON) in the test signal output data area Save (step B510).
Furthermore, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the common voltage solenoid, the on data is saved in the common power solenoid output data area (step B511), and the common power count number storing the winning number to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 The information on the area is cleared (step B512), and the information on the number of common prize wrong prize areas storing the number of prizes to the normal variation winning device 37 in the common sense electric charge monitoring period is cleared (step B513). Then, a flag for defining the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal change winning a prize apparatus 37 (flag outside the fraud monitoring period flag) is saved in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the processing of the common map display is ended.

[Every time per popular map]
Next, the details of the common drawing in the common drawing game process (step B11) will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the middle processing per normal drawing, first, the middle control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the common control pointer per loaded common drawing is greater than or equal to the upper limit It is determined (step B602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer in the common drawing is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step B602; N), the control pointer in the common drawing is updated by +1 (step B603), and Go and finish the process during the popular map.
If the value of the control pointer during the common drawing is greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; Y), then the general processing shift is performed without performing processing of updating the processing control pointer area during the common drawing by +1 in step B603. The setting process (step B604) is performed, and the process is ended during the common drawing.

[Puppet operation transition setting process]
FIG. 76 shows the general-purpose power transition setting process (step B604) in the above-described middle-round process. The routine operation shift setting process is a process for controlling the drive of the routine power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (general control pointer). It is like that. In this routine operation transition setting process, first, a branch process is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B611). Note that the value of the control pointer used here is the value loaded in step B601 and is the value before being updated by +1 in step B603.

  If the value of the control pointer is either 0, 2 or 5, the process proceeds to step B 612 to block the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, so the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 corresponding to the control pointer is closed. Save the later wait time (here, 300 ms) in the general game processing timer area (step B612), and save the off data in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c (step B613) , End the routine operation transition setting process.

  In addition, when the value of the control pointer is either 1 or 3, the process proceeds to step B614, and the opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is controlled, so the opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 corresponding to the control pointer Save the on-data in the general-purpose solenoid output data area in order to save the general-purpose open circuit time (1700 ms here), which is the time, in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B614) and turn on the general-electric solenoid 37c. Step B615) The general power on operation transition setting process is ended.

  If the value of the control pointer is 6, the process proceeds to step B 616 to control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, and the general electric power, which is the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 corresponding to the control pointer, The open time (here, 2600 ms) is saved in the common game processing timer area (step B616), and the on data is saved in the common solenoid output data area to turn on the common solenoid 37c (step B617). End the power on transition setting process.

  If the value of the control pointer is either 4 or 7, the process proceeds to step B 618 to end the release control of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 and perform generalization residual ball processing, so as a processing number "4" is set (step B618). Then, the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (step B619), and the generalization residual ball processing time (here, 600 ms) is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B620). Thereafter, in order to turn off the common solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (step B621), and the common power operation transition setting process is ended.

  FIG. 77 shows the operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 controlled by the above-described processing. The result is shown in FIG. 77 (a) and the case of symbol 1 (open pattern 1) is shown. The fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game ends (t81), and when the common drawing display time for displaying the hit result elapses (t82), the hit state is started and the opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is started.

  In the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, opening of 1700 ms (t82 to t83, t84 to t85, t86 to t87) and closing of 300 ms (t83 to t84, t85 to t86) are alternately performed. Then, when the third release is completed (t87), the remaining sphere processing time of 600 ms is obtained (t87 to t88), and then the ending time of 100 ms is obtained (t88 to t89). When the ending time is over (t89), the hit state is over and it is possible to execute a new common drawing variation display game.

  The result is shown in FIG. 77 (b) and the case of symbol 2 (open pattern 2) is shown. When the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game ends (t91), and the common drawing display time for displaying the hit result elapses (t92), the hit state is started and the opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is started. In the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, opening of 2600 ms (t92 to t93, t94 to t95) is performed with closing of 300 ms (t93 to t94). When the second release is completed (t95), the remaining sphere processing time of 600 ms is obtained (t95 to t96), and then the ending time of 100 ms is obtained (t96 to t97). When the ending time is over (t97), the hit state is over and it becomes possible to execute a new common drawing variation display game.

  In addition, even if it is any opening pattern, when the game ball of specified number (here six) wins normally fluctuation winning a prize device 37, opening of normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 ends at that time, remaining ball processing It will be time.

[Puden residual ball treatment]
Next, the details of the routine charge remaining ball processing (step B12) in the above-described regular game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in the generalization residual ball processing, first, the processing number "5" related to the end processing per common drawing is set (step B711), and the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (B Step B712).

  Next, save the common drawing ending time (100 ms in this case) in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B 713), and send a signal related to the termination of operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (for example, OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the common charge count number area for counting the number of winning to the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is cleared (step B715). Then, the control pointer area in the common drawing is cleared (step B716), the end pointer area in the common drawing is cleared (step B717), and the general electric ball remaining ball processing is ended.

[End processing per popular map]
Next, the details of the end-of-round-figure end process (step B13) in the above-mentioned ordinary-figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 79, in the end processing per common drawing, first, the processing number "0" relating to the general processing is set (step B811), and the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (step B812).

  Next, save the signal (for example, the signal is turned off during the normal symbol 1) to the test signal output data area (step B813), and define the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The flag (during fraud monitoring period flag) is saved in the routine power transmission fraud monitoring period flag area (step B 814), and the per-chart drawing end processing is ended.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special view 1 reserve display 54, the special view 2 reserve display 55, the general drawing reserve display 75, the first gaming state display 76, and the second gaming state display provided in the collective display device 50. The setting regarding driving of the segment LED constituting the unit 77, the third gaming state display unit 78, and the round display unit 60 is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blink control timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and it is determined whether the output on timing is based on whether the specific bit of the blink control timer is 1 or not. (Step S502). In the present embodiment, when the bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on timing, thereby creating a blinking cycle of 128 ms.

  If the output is on timing (step S502; Y), the common drawing reservation number display table 1 is set among the common drawing reservation number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode in the common drawing reservation display is defined. (Step S503) When it is not the output on timing (Step S502; N), the common drawing reserve number display table 2 is set (Step S504). Then, display data corresponding to the common drawing reservation number is acquired from the set common drawing reservation number display table, and saved in the segment area for the common drawing reservation display provided in the RAM 111C (step S505). In the present embodiment, if the common drawing reserve number is any one of “0” to “2”, the display data becomes the same regardless of which common drawing reserve number display table is set.

  Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S506), and in the case of the output on timing (step S506; Y), the special figure 1 reserve number in which the display mode on the special figure 1 reserve indicator is defined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold count display table 1 is set (step S507), and when it is not the output on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 hold count display table 2 is set (step S506) Step S508). Then, display data corresponding to the special drawing 1 holding number is acquired from the set special drawing 1 holding number display table and saved in the segment area for the special drawing 1 holding indicator provided in the RAM 111C (step S509).

Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S510), and in the case of the output on timing (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 reserve number display in which the display mode on the special view 2 reserve indicator is defined. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 pending number display table 1 is set (step S511), and when it is not the output on timing (step S510; N), the special figure 2 pending number display table 2 is set (step S510) S512). Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reserve number is acquired from the set special figure 2 reserve number display table, and saved in the segment area for the special figure 2 reserve indicator provided in the RAM 111C (step S513).
Furthermore, a round display table in which the display mode in the round display unit is defined is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired, and a segment for the round display unit provided in the RAM 111C. Save to the area (step S515).

  Next, when the time saving state occurs, the game state display table 1 is set in which the display mode in the first game state display unit 76 is lit to notify the occurrence of the time saving state (step S516). The display data corresponding to is acquired and saved in the segment area for the first gaming state display unit 76 provided in the RAM 111C (step S517). In the present embodiment, the first gaming state display unit 76 consisting of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal operation and to be turned on during special view time (during common power support).

  Thereafter, the gaming state display table 2 is set in which the display mode in the second gaming state display unit 77 is notified that the gaming state is more advantageous to the right hitting than the left hitting (step S518). The display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area for the second game state display unit 77 provided in the RAM 111C (step S519). In the present embodiment, the second game state display unit 77 consisting of one LED is turned off at the time of normal hitting (left hitting), and at the time of right hitting (in the case of the present embodiment, during a big hit, during general support). It is configured to light up.

  Then, it is determined whether the high probability notification flag which is turned on when the jackpot probability state is high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (step S520), and the high probability notification flag is on. If it is (step S520; Y), the off data of the high probability notification LED (the third gaming state display unit 78) is saved in the segment area (step S521), and the segment LED editing process is ended. If the high probability notification flag is off (step S520; N), the segment LED editing process is ended without saving the off data of the high probability notification LED in the segment area.

[Abnormal discharge monitoring process]
Next, details of the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step S113) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the number of gaming balls existing for each of the upper flow passage 38 j and the lower flow passage 38 k is managed, and an abnormal discharge error occurs when the discharge is detected despite the existence of the gaming balls being 0. Perform processing and processing related to cancellation of abnormal discharge error.

As shown in FIG. 81, in the abnormal discharge monitoring process, it is first determined whether an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S551). When the abnormal discharge error is occurring, the abnormal discharge error flag is set in the abnormal discharge error flag area. Here, whether or not the abnormal discharge error is in progress by the presence or absence of the abnormal discharge error flag judge.
If the abnormal discharge error is not occurring (step S551; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input on the lower prize winning opening switch (step S552), and if there is no input (step S552; N), the process proceeds to step S554. Do. If there is an input to the lower large winning opening switch (step S552; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 1 managing the number of gaming balls in the upper channel 38j is updated by 1 (step S553), and the process proceeds to step S554. .

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step S554), and when there is no input (step S554; N), the process proceeds to step S558. Further, when there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d (step S554; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 2 for managing the number of gaming balls in the lower flow passage 38k is updated by +1 (step S555). It is determined whether it is 0 (step S556).

  If the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S556; Y), the process proceeds to step S565 to perform processing when an abnormality occurs. In the process at the time of abnormality occurrence, an abnormal discharge error flag is prepared (step S565), an abnormal discharge generation command is prepared (step S566), and the process proceeds to step S572. That is, in this case, although the abnormal discharge counter 1 managing the number of gaming balls in the upper flow passage 38j is 0, there is an input to the probability change operation area switch 38d detecting the gaming balls flowing out from the upper flow passage 38j Since this is the case, processing at the time of abnormality occurrence is performed.

  On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge counter 1 is not 0 (step S556; N), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is updated by 1 (step S557), and it is determined whether there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S558). If there is no input to the passage port switch 38g (step S558; N), the process proceeds to step S562. If there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step S558; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 2 is updated by +1 (step S559), and it is determined whether the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S560). Then, if the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S560; Y), the process proceeds to step S565 to perform processing when an abnormality occurs. That is, in this case, although the abnormal discharge counter 1 for managing the number of gaming balls in the upper flow passage 38j is 0, there is an input to the passage port switch 38g for detecting gaming balls flowing out from the upper flow passage 38j. Since this is the case, processing at the time of abnormality occurrence is performed.

  If the abnormal discharge counter 1 is not 0 (step S560; N), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is updated by 1 (step S561), and it is determined whether there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S562). If there is no input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S562; N), the process proceeds to step S570. If the discharge confirmation switch 38e receives an input (step S562; Y), it is determined whether the abnormal discharge counter 2 is 0 (step S563). Then, if the abnormal discharge counter 2 is 0 (step S563; Y), the process proceeds to step S565 to perform processing when an abnormality occurs. That is, in this case, although the abnormal discharge counter 2 managing the number of gaming balls in the lower flow passage 38k is 0, an input is made to the discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting the gaming balls discharged from the lower flow passage 38k. Since this is the case, processing at the time of abnormality occurrence is performed.

  If the abnormal discharge counter 2 is not 0 (step S563; N), the abnormal discharge counter 2 is updated by 1 (step S564), and the process proceeds to step S570. In this case, no abnormality has occurred. Thereafter, an abnormal discharge cancellation flag is prepared (step S570), an abnormal discharge cancellation command is prepared (step S571), and it is determined whether the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area matches the prepared flag (step S572).

  On the other hand, if the abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S551; Y), it is determined whether or not the initialization switch 112 has an input (step S567). If there is no input (step S567; N), the abnormal discharge is End the monitoring process. In this case, the abnormal discharge error continues to occur. If there is an input to the initialization switch (step S 567; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is cleared to 0 (step S 568) and the abnormal discharge counter 2 is cleared to 0 (step S 568). S569). Thereafter, an abnormal discharge cancellation flag is prepared (step S570), an abnormal discharge cancellation command is prepared (step S571), and it is determined whether the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area matches the prepared flag (step S572).

If the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area matches the prepared flag (step S572; Y), the abnormal discharge monitoring process is ended.
If the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area does not match the prepared flag (step S572; N), the prepared flag is saved in the abnormal discharge error flag area (step S573), and effect command setting processing is performed (step S573) S 574). Thereby, either the abnormal discharge occurrence command or the abnormal discharge cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 notifies that an abnormal discharge error is occurring in response to the reception of the abnormal discharge occurrence command. Since this abnormal discharge error is an error for stopping the game, the progress of the effect is also stopped, and while the abnormal discharge error is occurring, the error notification is continuously performed. In addition, the game effect is resumed upon receiving the abnormal discharge cancellation command, and the notification that the abnormal discharge error is occurring is ended.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the new flag is the abnormal discharge cancellation flag (step S574). If the new flag is not the abnormal discharge cancellation flag (step S574; N), the abnormal discharge monitoring process is ended.
If the abnormal discharge cancellation flag is set (step S574; Y), that is, if the abnormal discharge error is canceled based on the operation of the initialization switch 112, it is determined whether a customer waiting demo is in progress. Then, if the customer waiting demo is not in progress (Step S576; N), the abnormal discharge monitoring process is ended.
If a customer waiting demo is in progress (step S576; Y), a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step S577), a rendering command setting process is performed (step S578), and the abnormal discharge monitoring process is ended. Although the game is resumed along with the release of the error occurrence error, when it is in the customer waiting demo state at the time of restart, the command is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 in another process, so here the effect control device 300 By transmitting the customer waiting demo command to the, the presentation of the customer waiting demonstration state is started.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S114) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and the end of fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal. It is determined whether or not magnetism is detected (step S601).
If the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (step S602). It is determined whether the time is up (step S603). In the case of the present embodiment, when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 ms or more, it is determined that time is up.

  If the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step S603; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60 seconds is saved in the magnet fraud alert timer area (step S605). Then, a command for magnet informing notification is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a predetermined period (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality occurs.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud specifying the notification time of the magnet fraud If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). In addition, the minimum value of the magnet fraud alerting | reporting timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is "0" (step S610). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is not time-up (step S603; N), it transfers to the process of step S609.

  Then, if the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is not "0" (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. Also, if the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is "0" (step S610; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time is up, and the fraud alert period ends, or from the beginning it is fraudulent If the notification has not been made, a command for magnet notification end is prepared (step S611). Furthermore, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

  Then, if the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), and rendering command setting processing is performed. Then (step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. Here, “step S601; N” → “step S608” → “step S609” → “step S610; Y” → “step S611” → “step S612” → “step S613; Y” are normal routes.

[Board radio wave fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S115) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, and the start and the end of the fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, It is determined whether the board radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701).
If the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value (for example, 60 seconds) of the radio wave fraud alert timer is saved in the radio wave fraud alert timer area (step S702).

  Then, prepare a command of board radio wave fraud notification (step S703), prepare a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S704), and prepare the prepared board radio wave fraud flag with the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times, while in the case of board radio wave fraud, the board radio sensor 62 is detected once. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred at the time of

  On the other hand, if the board radio wave sensor 62 is not on (step S 701; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer defining the notification time of radio wave fraud is not “0” −1 It updates (step S705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is "0" (step S706).

  If the value of the radio wave injustice timer is not “0” (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave improper monitoring process is ended. If the value of the radio wave informing timer is "0" (step S706; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time has already been up, and the period of the informing notification ends, or from the beginning it is incorrect. If the notification has not been made, prepare a command to terminate the board radio wave illegal notification (step S 707), prepare a board radio wave illegality cancellation flag as the board radio wave illegality flag (step S 708), and the prepared board radio wave illegality flag It is determined whether the value of the board radio wave illegal flag area matches (step S709).

  Then, if the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing is ended. If the prepared board radio wave fraud flag does not match the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S710), and the rendering command is performed. The setting process is performed (step S711), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is ended. Here, “step S701; N” → “step S705” → “step S706; Y” → “step S707” → “step S708” → “step S709; Y” are normal routes.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S116) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results in each process, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or game arcade internal control device or a test shot test device is created and set in an output buffer .

  As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, in the external information editing process, first, it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of a switch is occurring (step S 751), and a switch abnormality error is not occurring ( Step S751; N) saves the off data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (step S752), and proceeds to step S754. If the switch abnormal error is occurring (step S751; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S753), and the process proceeds to step S754.

If the glass frame opening error does not occur (step S754; N) or the body frame opening error does not occur (step S755; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is set to the external information output data area. Then, the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S757), and the process proceeds to step S760.
On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S754; Y) or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S755; Y), the on data of the door / frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S758), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S759), and the process proceeds to step S760.

  Then, if the security signal control timer, which measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch or the like, is updated by -1 unless it is "0". Step S760). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set at the time of setting the initial value of the RAM when activated by clearing the RAM in the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S761).

If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S761; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S762), step S763 Transfer to processing of
If the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S761; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the process of step S762 is not performed, and the process of step S763 is performed. Transition.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 85, abnormal discharge error, magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, residual ball error, discharge ball error, V abnormal passage error, upper large winning opening illegality, lower large winning opening illegality, commonplace illegality and vibration If at least one of the frauds is being generated (at least one of steps S763 to S772 is Y), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S773), and the security data is on data. Are stored in the external information output data area (step S776), and the process proceeds to step S777. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

  On the other hand, abnormal discharge error, magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, residual ball error, discharge ball error, V abnormal passage error, upper large winning a prize opening fraud, lower large winning a prize opening fraud, commonplace fraud and vibration fraud are all occurring. If not (all of steps S763 to S772 are N), the process proceeds to step S774. If the frame radio wave irregularity is not occurring (step S774; N) and there is no definite change operation area abnormal passage information (step S775; N), the process proceeds to step S777. Also, if frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S774; Y) or there is a probability variation operation area abnormal passage information (step S775; Y), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S776). ), Shift to step S777. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

Then, main prize ball signal editing processing (step S777) is performed to set information on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out, and starting opening signal editing processing (step S778) is performed to edit the winning opening signal of the starting opening.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S779). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is "0" (step S780).

If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S780; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area Then (step S781), the external information editing process is ended.
If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S780; N), that is, if the time is not up, save the on data of the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area (step S781), end the external information editing process.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S777) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The main prize ball signal editing process externally generates the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (predetermined number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening becomes a predetermined number (10 in the case of this embodiment). It is processing to output to the device.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of times the main prize ball signal output is "0" (step S833).

Then, if the main prize ball signal output number is not "0" (step S833; N), the main prize ball signal output number is updated by -1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal control timer area is displayed. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S 835). The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is the time between the on state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal (for example, 128 ms) and the time for the off state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 ms) It is an on-state time (for example, 128 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.
If the main prize ball signal output count is "0" (step S833; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838) The main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0" (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period is that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0". If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S 836; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

In the present embodiment, a main prize ball signal is output from the game control device 100 every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out becomes 10, and the payout control device 200 comes to have 10 game balls paid out. A main prize ball signal is output each time.
Specifically, the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball number signal output frequency by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every 10 payout schedules (every time the payout command is transmitted), and updates (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) The main prize ball signal is output as many times as the number of outputs set.
Since the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 pieces of payout are actually performed for the main prize ball signal outputted for each schedule, the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to respond to fraudulent withdrawals. In addition, even if you win during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to a lack of balls, etc., and even if it is paid out after the big hit, the hall computer (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judged).

[Starting mouth signal editing process]
Next, details of the starting opening signal editing process (step S778) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The start opening signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 87, in the starting opening signal editing process, first, if the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S841). The minimum value of the starting opening signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842). When the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of starting opening signal output is "0" (step S843).

Then, if the starting opening signal output number is not "0" (step S843; N), the starting opening signal output number is updated by -1 (step S844), and the starting opening signal output control timer in the starting opening signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The starting opening signal output control timer initial value is the ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) of the starting opening signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) for the OFF state (for example, low level) It is on time (for example, 128 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the starting opening signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the starting opening signal editing process is ended.
In addition, when the number of start opening signal outputs is "0" (step S843; Y), the off data for turning off the start opening signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S 848), the start opening signal editing process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0" (step S842; N), it is determined whether the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846). In addition, that a starting opening signal output control timer is in an output on area is that the value of a starting opening signal output control timer is not "0". When the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. If the start-up signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the start-up signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM ( Step S848), the starting opening signal editing process is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening time of the special winning opening as well as the number of gaming balls that have won the special winning opening (the number of winning in the special winning opening) is also counted in the timer interrupt process.
Specifically, the opening time of the special winning opening (special variation winning devices 38, 39) is counted in the special figure game process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process. More specifically, the game control device 100 saves the special winning opening open time in the special figure game processing timer area in step A863 of the fanfare / in-interval process (step A14) in the special figure game process, and the special figure game At step A6 of the processing, the special figure game processing timer is updated by -1.

  In addition, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred in the power failure monitoring process (steps S36 to S38 of the main process), the game control device 100 performs a process (step S39) for temporarily prohibiting an interrupt, and outputs all A process of outputting off data to the port is performed (step S40). That is, when a power failure occurs, the timer interrupt process is inhibited, and the second output port 134 for outputting the operation data of the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the general power solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f is also turned off. Data is output. Since the opening time of the special winning opening is counted in the timer interrupt process, the opening time of the special winning opening is not counted when the timer interruption process is prohibited. In addition, when the off data is output to the second output port 134, the closing doors 38c and 38c of the special winning opening and the movable member 37b of the common charge start the closing operation (operation toward the closed state).

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), when the opening timing of the upper large winning opening is reached, the opening operation (opening state) of the open / close door 39c of the upper large winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) While the operation (heading operation) is started, the count of the opening time of the special winning opening is turned on (t101, t111). In addition, at the opening timing of the lower prize winning opening, the opening operation of the open / close door 38c of the lower winning prize opening (the first special variation winning device 38) is started, and the opening time of the winning prize opening is in the ON state. (T101, t111).
Thereafter, when a power failure occurs, the closing operation of the open / close doors 38c and 39c is started along with the occurrence of the power failure, and the opening time of the special winning opening is turned off and the counting is interrupted. (T103, t112).
Then, along with the recovery from the power failure, the opening operation of the open / close doors 38c and 39c is started, and the counting of the opening time of the special winning opening is turned on and the counting is restarted (t105, t114) .

Here, the state that the opening time of the special winning opening is ON means, for example, the state where the opening time of the special opening is being counted, that is, the special drawing game processing timer area Are saved, and timer interrupt processing is being executed at predetermined time intervals.
In addition, with the state where the opening time of the special winning opening is off, for example, the opening time of the special opening is not being counted, that is, the special opening game processing timer area The special prize game opening time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, but the timer interrupt process is prohibited. The special prize game opening time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. However, the power supply of the gaming machine is shut off and the timer interrupt process can not be executed.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), when a power failure occurs when the openable and closable doors 38c and 39c of the special winning opening are open (completely open), the open and close doors 38c and 39c are opened. Medium winning period (t101 to t102, t105 to t106), and a period (t102 to t103, t106 to) in which the open / close doors 38c and 39c are in the open state (complete open state) The period (t103 to t104) during which the open / close doors 38c and 39c are in the closing operation is not included in the opening time of the special winning opening (the opening time for control), which is included in the upper opening time).
For example, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), when a power failure occurs while the openable doors 38c and 39c of the special winning opening are open, a period during which the openable doors 38c and 39c are open. (T111 to t112, t114 to t116) and a period (t116 to) in which the open / close doors 38c and 39c are in the open state (complete open state) are included in the open time of the big winning opening (open time on control) On the other hand, the period (t112 to t113) in which the open / close doors 38c and 39c are in the closing operation is not included in the opening time (opening time in control) of the special winning opening.

Further, the number of winnings on the special winning opening (special variation winning devices 38 and 39) is counted in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108) of the timer interrupt process. More specifically, the gaming control device 100 performs the winning number counter updating process (step S331) of the fraud & winnings monitoring process (steps S302 and S304) in the winning hole switch / status monitoring process, and sets the value of the winning number counter area. Update +1.
As described above, when a power failure occurs, timer interrupt processing is prohibited. Since the number of winnings to the special winning opening is counted in the timer interrupt process, the number of winnings to the special winning opening is not counted when the timer interrupt process is prohibited.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), when a power failure occurs, with the occurrence of the power failure, the counting of the number of winnings on the special winning opening is turned off and the counting is performed. Is interrupted (t103, t112). Then, with the recovery from the power failure, the counting of the number of winnings on the special winning opening is turned on, and the counting is resumed (t105, t114).

Here, the state in which the count of the number of winnings to the special winning opening is ON means, for example, the state where the number of winnings to the special winning opening can be counted, that is, the timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined time period. is there.
Further, the state where the count of the number of winnings to the big winning opening is OFF means, for example, the state where the number of winnings to the big winning opening can not be counted, that is, the state where the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the power supply of the gaming machine It is in a state where it is cut off and timer interrupt processing can not be executed.

Similarly, in the present embodiment, the open time of the general electric power and the number of gaming balls awarded to the general electric power (the number of winning prizes of the general electric power) are also counted in the timer interrupt process.
Specifically, the open time of the universal power (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is counted in the regular game processing of the timer interrupt processing (step S111). More specifically, the game control device 100 performs the game at step B604 in the common drawing display processing (step B10) in the common drawing game processing or at step B604 in the common drawing processing in the common drawing game processing (step B11). The game open time is saved in the regular drawing game processing timer area, and the regular drawing game processing timer is updated by -1 in step B3 of the regular drawing game processing.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), at the release timing of the common charge, the opening operation of the movable member 37b of the common charge (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is started. The open time count is turned on (t101, t111).
Thereafter, when a power failure occurs, the closing operation of the movable member 37b is started along with the occurrence of the power failure, and the open time of the common charge is turned off and the counting is interrupted (see FIG. t103, t112).
Then, along with the recovery from the power failure, the opening operation of the movable member 37b is started, and the counting of the power transmission open time is turned on to restart the counting (t105, t114).

Here, the state in which the counting of the public opening time is ON means, for example, the state in which the counting of the public opening time is being executed, that is, the public opening time is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area. The timer interrupt process is being executed at predetermined time intervals.
In addition, the state where the count of the public open time is OFF means, for example, the state where the count of the public open time is not executed, that is, the public open time is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area. No state, the general game open time is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area, but the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the general electric open time is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area, but the game machine The power is shut off and the timer interrupt process can not be executed.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), when a power failure occurs when the movable member 37b of the common voltage is in the open state (completely open state), a period during which the movable member 37b is in the opening operation ( t101 to t102, t105 to t106) and a period (t102 to t103, t106 to) in which the movable member 37b is in the open state (completely open state) are included in the open time of the common charge (the open time in control). On the other hand, the period (t103 to t104) during which the movable member 37b is in the closing operation is not included in the open time of the common charge (the open time in control).
For example, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), when a power failure occurs while the movable member 37b of the common charge is in the opening operation, a period during which the movable member 37b is in the opening operation (t111 to t112, t114 to t116) and a period (t116 to) in which the movable member 37b is in the open state (completely open state) are included in the open time of the common charge (open time in control), while the movable member 37b performs the closing operation The medium period (t112 to t113) is not included in the open time of control (open time on control).

Further, the number of winnings on the common power (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is counted in the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing (step S108) of the timer interrupt processing. More specifically, the game control apparatus 100 updates the value of the winning number counter area by +1 in the winning number counter updating process (step S331) of the fraud & winnings monitoring process (step S306) in the winning hole switch / status monitoring process. Do.
Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), when a power failure occurs, with the occurrence of the power failure, the counting of the number of winning prizes to the general electric power is turned off, and the counting It is interrupted (t103, t112). Then, along with the recovery from the power failure, the count of the number of winning prizes to the common power supply is turned ON, and the count is resumed (t105, t114).

Here, the state in which the count of the number of winning prizes in the general electricity is ON means, for example, a state in which the number of winning prizes in the general electricity can be counted, that is, a state in which timer interrupt processing is executed in a predetermined time cycle.
In addition, the state where the count of the number of prize winnings to the general electric power is OFF means, for example, the state where the number of winning prizes to the general electric number can not be counted, that is, the state where timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the power of the gaming machine is shut off And the timer interrupt process can not be executed.

  In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), when a power failure occurs while the special winning opening or the pressure control opening / closing member (opening / closing doors 38c, 39c or movable member 37b) is open. Thus, the length of the period (t111 to t112) in which the opening / closing member is in the opening operation just before the power failure occurs, the length of the period (t112 to t113) in which the opening / closing member is in the closing operation immediately after the power failure, and The length of the period (t114 to t115) until the opening amount (degree of opening) of the opening and closing member in the period during which the opening and closing member in the opening operation is in operation matches the opening amount at the time of power failure occurrence is the same.

By the way, the special winning opening and the common electric power are not only in a period in which the opening and closing members (opening and closing doors 38c and 39c and the movable member 37b) are in the opening operation and a period in which The period is open. Needless to say, the opening amount of the opening / closing member in the period during the opening operation or the period during the closing operation is smaller than the maximum opening amount (the opening amount in the opening state (complete opening state)).
Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to ensure consistency between the apparent opening time (physical opening time) and the control opening time, a period during which the opening / closing member is in the closing operation immediately after a power failure occurs. (In the case of FIG. 88 (a), t103 to t104, in the case of FIG. 88 (b), t112 to t113, hereinafter referred to as the “closing operation in progress period”) There were some cases where the open time count was kept ON.

However, when the closing operation period is included in the control opening time, it is disadvantageous for the player because the remaining opening time (the first opening time after recovery from the power failure) becomes short.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), when a power failure occurs in the middle of the open time count, when the game control device 100 recovers from the power failure, the open time is counted from the continuation thereof. Resume Therefore, when the closing operation period is included in the control opening time, the remaining opening time is shortened by the length of the closing operation period. That is, since the start timing of the first closing operation after the power failure recovery (for example, the timing at which the opening / closing member opened after the power failure recovery starts the closing operation) becomes earlier by the length of the closing operation period. It is disadvantageous for

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, it is disadvantageous for the player by configuring so that the closing operation period is not included in the control opening time (that is, the opening operation count is turned off during the closing operation period). It becomes possible to perform control which does not become. Since the closing operation period is a period during which the winning opening to the big winning opening and the counting of winning balls to the public is in the OFF state, it is not actually a period advantageous to the player, but the winning opening and the public Is an open period, it can be said that it is a period that seems to be advantageous to the player.
That is, in the present embodiment, the closing operation period (period in which the opening / closing member is in the closing operation immediately after the occurrence of a power failure) is a period in which game balls may flow into the winning opening or the pot It can be said that it is an apparent advantageous period because gaming balls that have flowed into the big winning opening and the Fuden during the operation period are not counted as winning balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 outputs off data to all output ports. That is, when a power failure occurs, energization of various devices (such as solenoid and collective display device 50) controlled by the game control device 100 is forcibly stopped.
On the other hand, since the effect control device 300 is not configured to receive the power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and is not configured to be notified of the occurrence of the power failure from the game control device 100, The effect control device 300 can not determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs, energization to various devices (display device 41, panel decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18, panel effect device 44, speakers 19a, 19b, etc.) controlled by effect control device 300 is compulsory. Not stopped. That is, when a power failure occurs, the amount of current supplied to various devices controlled by the effect control device 300 naturally decreases and eventually becomes zero.

Therefore, the various devices controlled by the effect control device 300 stop their operation after those whose power supply is forcibly stopped at the time of the power failure (for example, various devices controlled by the game control device 100) when the power failure occurs. Do. Also, at that time, various devices controlled by the effect control device 300 operate at 32 V (motor, solenoid, etc.) → operate at 15 V (motor, LED, speakers 19 a, 19 b, etc.) → 12 V The operation is stopped in the order of operating (display device 41, motor, LED, etc.) → operating at 5 V.
Therefore, when the blackout occurs, the decoration control device (LED) is controlled by the effect control device 300 after the big winning opening and the door of the common charge (opening and closing doors 38c and 39c and the movable member 37b) are closed In order to stop, the closing operation of the opening and closing member can be performed in the illuminated state, and the closing operation of the opening and closing member can be made conspicuous.

The effect control device 300 may be configured to receive a power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400, or may be configured to be notified of the occurrence of a power failure from the game control device 100.
That is, the effect control device 300 may be configured to be able to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 can determine the presence or absence of a power failure, and when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power to at least a part of various devices controlled by the effect control device 300 is forced. It may be configured to stop.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with winning openings (the special fluctuation winning devices 38, 39 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37) which are opened and closed by the opening and closing members (opening and closing doors 38c and 39c and the movable member 37b). In the game machine, counting means (the game control apparatus 100) for counting the number of gaming balls that have won in the winning opening, time counting means (the game control apparatus 100) for counting the opening time of the opening / closing member A power failure determination means (game control apparatus 100) for determining whether or not it is generated, and the counting means is a game when it is determined by the power failure determination means that a power failure is occurring (step S38; Y) The ball number is not counted (step S39), and the open / close member is converted into an open state (a state in which the big winning opening and the poten is open) and a closed state (a state in which the big winning opening and the poten is closed) Possible If, during the opening operation toward the open state, it is determined by the power failure determination means that a power failure has occurred (step S38; Y), the closing operation toward the closed state is immediately executed (step S40) If the power failure judging means judges that a power failure has occurred during the opening operation (step S38; Y), the clocking device clocks the opening time during the opening operation just before the power failure. However, during the closing operation immediately after the occurrence of the power failure, the open time is not counted (step S39).

  Therefore, since the remaining open time (the first open time after power failure recovery) is not shortened, it is not disadvantageous for the player regarding the open time, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest caused by the power failure.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when power failure occurs in the middle of the opening operation and the power is restored from the power failure, the clocking device (game control device 100) is opened from the continuation of time counting just before the power failure. It can be configured to resume timing of time.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to maintain the fairness and fairness of the game because there is no occurrence of a player who becomes advantageous with respect to the open time and a player who is at a disadvantage with the occurrence of a power failure.

<Modification 1>
For example, as shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, it is also possible to configure to execute the processing of step S36 to step S45 of the main processing in the above embodiment by timer interrupt processing.
Specifically, in the main processing in the present modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 89, after the initial value random number update processing in step S35, power failure monitoring processing (steps S36 to S38) is not performed, but in step S35. The initial value random number updating process is configured to be repeatedly performed.

Further, in the timer interrupt process according to this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 90, the power failure monitoring process (steps S36 to S38) is performed after the processes of steps S101 and S102. Specifically, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S101), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). Next, the number of times (for example, 2) to check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 is set (step S36), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37).
If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the processing of steps S103 to S116 is performed. If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38).
If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination (step S37) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine performs the processing of steps S40 to S45, It is configured to wait for the power supply to be shut off.

<Modification 2>
For example, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), the main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 is replaced with the process (step S40) of outputting off data to all output ports, and an output port other than the second output port 134 ( A process (step S40a) of outputting the off data to the third output port 135, the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137 may be performed.
With such a configuration, off data is not output at the time of a power failure to the second output port 134 for outputting the operation data of the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the common solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f. The closing operation period (the period which seems to be advantageous to the player) can be prolonged, and the player does not feel lost.

Specifically, in the case of this modification, even if a power failure occurs, the energization to the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the common voltage solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f is not forcibly stopped. That is, when a power failure occurs, the amount of current supplied to the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the common voltage solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f naturally decreases and eventually becomes zero. On the other hand, when off data is also output to the second output port 134 when a power failure occurs as in the above embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the common control solenoid 37c, and the lever Energization to the solenoid 38f is forcibly stopped.
Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the case of the present modification, the closing operation in-progress period is longer than in the case of the above embodiment (in the case shown by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 91 (b)).

The special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the common electric solenoid 37c and the lever solenoid 38f have a built-in return spring, and when the solenoid is deenergized, the movable iron core is at the initial position by the return spring. It is configured to return to.
When off data is also output to the second output port 134 when a power failure occurs as in the above embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the common current solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f are output. The amount of current flow immediately becomes zero. That is, when a power failure occurs, the force against the biasing force of the return spring decreases sharply.
On the other hand, if off data is not output to the second output port 134 when a power failure occurs as in the present modification, if a power failure occurs, the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the common current solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f. The amount of energization to the current naturally decreases and eventually becomes zero. That is, when a power failure occurs, the force against the biasing force of the return spring gradually decreases.
Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), when off data is not output to the second output port 134 when a power failure occurs, off data is also output to the second output port 134 when a power failure occurs. Because the start timing of the closing operation of the opening and closing members (opening and closing doors 38c and 38c and the movable member 37b) is delayed compared with the case where it is output, and the operation speed of the opening and closing members closing operation is delayed. The medium period can be prolonged.

Further, the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the common electric solenoid 37c and the lever solenoid 38f operate at 32 V, while the decoration device (LED) controlled by the effect control device 300 operates at 15 V or 12 V.
Therefore, in the case of this modification, the decoration control device controlled by the effect control device 300 after the big winning opening and the open / close members (open / close doors 38c and 39c and the movable member 37b) become closed when a power failure occurs. Since the operation of the (LED) is stopped, the closing operation of the opening and closing member can be performed in the illuminated state, and the closing operation of the opening and closing member can be made conspicuous.

  Further, in the present modification, since the off data is output to the output port other than the second output port 134 when the power failure occurs, the batch display device 50 is completely turned off when the power failure occurs. Therefore, when a power failure occurs, the operation of the collective display device 50 is stopped earlier than the open / close doors 38c and 39c of the special winning opening, the movable member 37b of the common electric power and the lever member 38i in the first special fluctuation winning device 38.

  In this modification, when a power failure occurs when the open / close members (open / close doors 38c and 39c and movable member 37b) are in the open state (complete open state) (in the case shown in FIG. 91 (b)) Not only when the power failure occurs while the open / close member is in the opening operation, the off data is not output to the second output port 134 when the power failure occurs. Therefore, even when a power failure occurs while the opening and closing member is in the opening operation, the closing operation period can be extended.

  Of course, as in the first modification, the present modification can also be applied to the case where the processing of step S36 to step S45 of the main processing in the above embodiment is performed by timer interrupt processing. That is, even when the process of step S36 to step S45 is performed by the timer interrupt process, an output port other than the second output port 134 (third output) is replaced with the process (step S40) of outputting the off data to all output ports. A process (step S40a) of outputting the off data to the port 135, the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137) can be performed.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification has a gaming port provided with winning openings (the special fluctuation winning devices 38, 39 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37) which are opened and closed by the opening and closing members (opening and closing doors 38c and 39c and the movable member 37b). Opening / closing member solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b,) which converts the opening / closing member from the closed state (the state where the big winning opening and the general charge are closed) to the open state (the state where the large winning opening and the general electricity is open) 39b, a common electric solenoid 37c), open / close control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the open / close member solenoid, counting means (game control apparatus 100) for counting the number of game balls winning in the winning opening; The blackout determination means (game control apparatus 100) for determining whether or not it is generated, and the counting means is determined by the blackout determination means to have a blackout (step S38; And the opening / closing control means does not execute counting of the number of gaming balls (step S39), and the opening / closing control means changes the opening / closing member to the open state (outputs on data to the second output port 134), Blockage control (output of off data to the second output port 134) for returning to the blockage state can be performed, and it is determined by the power failure determination unit that a power failure has occurred (step S38; Y) In addition, the opening control and the closing control are not performed (step S40a).

Therefore, even if a power failure occurs, the closing control for returning the opening and closing member to the closing state is not executed (off data is not output to the second output port 134). Can delay at least one of the operation speed at the time of the closing operation. That is, since the closing operation period can be prolonged, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest caused by the occurrence of a power failure.
Further, since the closing operation period can be prolonged, the player can grasp the state of the opening / closing member immediately before the occurrence of the power failure even after the occurrence of the power failure.
In addition, since the closing operation period can be prolonged, the timing at which counting of the number of gaming balls is interrupted when a power failure occurs (when a power failure occurs) and the opening / closing member reaches a blocked state when a power failure occurs. The timing difference can be made larger.

<Modification 3>
For example, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), the main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 is replaced with the process (step S40) of outputting the off data to all output ports, and an output port other than the second output port 134 ( A process (step S40a) of outputting off data to the third output port 135, the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137), and a process of storing validity determination data (steps S41 to S44) and RWM A process (step S40b) of outputting the off data to the second output port 134 may be performed between the process of prohibiting the access to (step S45) and the process of prohibiting the access (step S45).

  By this configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), it is not the time when a power failure occurs (t132) but a predetermined time after the power failure occurs (specifically, data storage for validity determination) When the processing time of the process (steps S41 to S44), for example, 0.5 millisecond, has elapsed (t133), the closing operation of the special winning opening and the public door opening / closing members (opening / closing doors 38c and 39c and movable member 37b) As a result, the closing operation period (the period which appears to be advantageous to the player) can be prolonged and the player does not feel lost.

  In this modification, not only when a power failure occurs while the opening and closing members (opening and closing doors 38c and 39c and the movable member 37b) are in the opening operation (as shown in FIG. 92 (b)), Even when a power failure occurs when the open / close member is in the open state (complete open state), the off data is output to the second output port 134 after the data processing for validity determination data (steps S41 to S44). Therefore, even when a power failure occurs when the open / close member is in the open state (complete open state), the closing operation period can be extended.

Further, in FIG. 92 (a), a process (step S40a) of outputting off data to an output port other than the second output port 134 (the third output port 135, the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137). The processing may be performed after the legitimacy determination data storage process (steps S41 to S44).
Of course, as in the first modification, the present modification can also be applied to the case where the processing of step S36 to step S45 of the main processing in the above embodiment is performed by timer interrupt processing.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification has a gaming port provided with winning openings (the special fluctuation winning devices 38, 39 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37) which are opened and closed by the opening and closing members (opening and closing doors 38c and 39c and the movable member 37b). Opening / closing member solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b,) which converts the opening / closing member from the closed state (the state where the big winning opening and the general charge are closed) to the open state (the state where the large winning opening and the general electricity is open) 39b, a common electric solenoid 37c), open / close control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the open / close member solenoid, counting means (game control apparatus 100) for counting the number of game balls winning in the winning opening; The blackout determination means (game control apparatus 100) for determining whether or not it is generated, and the counting means is determined by the blackout determination means to have a blackout (step S38; And the opening / closing control means does not execute counting of the number of gaming balls (step S39), and the opening / closing control means changes the opening / closing member to the open state (outputs on data to the second output port 134), Blockage control (output of off data to the second output port 134) for returning to the blockage state can be performed, and it is determined by the power failure determination unit that a power failure has occurred (step S38; Y) In addition, the block control is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed (step S40b).

Therefore, when a power failure occurs, the closing control for returning the opening / closing member to the closed state is executed after a predetermined time elapses, so that the period during the closing operation can be prolonged, and the interest caused by the power failure is reduced. It can be suppressed.
In addition, by performing the closing control for returning the opening and closing member to the closing state after a predetermined time has elapsed, it is possible to shift to a natural closing operation even when a power failure occurs, which impairs the player's interest (cut away ) There is no.

  Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is stored in storage means (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing various data even when backup power is supplied and power failure occurs, and is stored in the storage means when power is turned on. When it is determined that a power failure has occurred by the legitimacy determination means (game control device 100) that determines the correctness of the predetermined data being present and the power failure determination means (game control device 100) (step S38; Y) And data generation means (game control apparatus 100) for executing processing (data storage processing for legitimacy determination (steps S41 to S44)) of generating predetermined data and storing the data in storage means, and after a predetermined time has elapsed Is configured to be after the processing has been performed by the data generation means.

That is, the open / close control means (game control apparatus 100) is a data generation means (game control apparatus 100) when the power failure determination means (game control apparatus 100) determines that a power failure is occurring (step S38; Y). The block control is executed (step S40b) after the above process (data storage process for legitimacy determination (steps S41 to S44)) is executed.
Therefore, when a power failure occurs, after the validity determination data storage process (steps S41 to S44) is executed, the closing control for returning the opening / closing member to the closed state is executed, so the closing operation period is performed. Can be prolonged, and the decline in interest due to the occurrence of a power failure can be effectively suppressed.

<Modification 4>
For example, as shown in FIG. 93 (a), the main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 is replaced with the process (step S40) of outputting off data to all output ports, and an output port other than the second output port 134 ( A process of outputting off data to the third output port 135, the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137 (step S40a), an opening and closing member for the special winning opening and the common charge (opening and closing doors 38c and 39c and the movable member 37b Is configured to perform processing of waiting for the delay time until the) becomes completely open (step S46), and processing of outputting off data to the second output port 134 after the delay time has elapsed (step S40b). It is also possible.

  In this modification, as a delay time until the fully open state, a time from when the open / close door 38c starts the open operation to when it becomes the completely open state, and completely open after the open / close door 39c starts the open operation The longest time is set among the time to reach the state and the time from the start of the opening operation of the movable member 37b to the full opening state. As a result, when a power failure occurs while the opening and closing members (opening and closing doors 38c and 39c and the movable member 37b) are in the opening operation, the timing of occurrence of the power failure (at which timing in the opening operation of the opening and closing members the power failure occurred Regardless of), since the opening and closing member can be shifted to the closing operation after being in the completely open state, it does not harm the player's interest.

  With this configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), the predetermined time after the occurrence of the power failure (specifically, the opening operation is started, not when the power failure occurs (t142). When the same time as the time from when to the fully open state) has elapsed (t143), the closing operation of the special winning opening and the universal door open / close members (opening / closing doors 38c and 39c and movable member 37b) is started Therefore, the period during which the closing operation is in progress (the period which seems to be advantageous to the player) can be prolonged, and the player does not feel lost. Further, regardless of the timing of occurrence of the power failure, the opening / closing member can be shifted to the closing operation after being in the completely open state, so that the interest of the player is not impaired.

Note that the delay time until the completely open state can be appropriately changed.
For example, the time from the start of the opening operation of the opening / closing member to the occurrence of a power failure (the length of t141 to t142 in the case of FIG. 93 (b)) is measured, and the opening operation is started. It is also possible to configure such that the measured time is subtracted from the time until it reaches (the time stored in advance), and the subtraction result is set as the delay time until the completely open state is reached. With such a configuration, for example, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 93 (b), the closing member can immediately shift to the closing operation when it is in the completely open state.

  In addition, when the time from the game ball being fired to the time it flows into the winning area is longer than the time from the opening and closing member starting the opening operation to the complete opening state, until the complete opening state is reached. It is also possible to configure as a delay time for setting the time from when the gaming ball is fired to when it flows into the winning area. By configuring in this manner, the special winning opening or the game until all of the gaming balls (the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area 32) remaining in the gaming area 32 at the time of the power failure flow into the winning area or the out port 30a. The player can not feel lost because it can open the common station.

  In addition, the time from the occurrence of a power failure to the time when the operation of the decorative device (LED) controlled by the effect control device 300 is stopped is longer than the time from the start of the opening operation of the opening / closing member to the complete opening state. Is configured to set the time from the occurrence of a power failure to the stop of the operation of the decoration device (LED) controlled by the effect control device 300 as the delay time until the completely open state is reached. It is also possible. By configuring in this way, the operation of the special winning opening and the open / close member of the common charge is stopped substantially simultaneously with the operation of the decoration device (LED) controlled by the effect control device 300, so the closing of the open / close member The operation and the turning-off operation of the decoration device (LED) can be interlocked, and the closing operation of the opening and closing member can be made conspicuous.

  Further, in the present modification, not only when a power failure occurs while the opening and closing members (opening and closing doors 38c and 39c and the movable member 37b) are open (as shown in FIG. 93 (b)), Even when a power failure occurs when the open / close member is in the open state (complete open state), the off data is output to the second output port 134 after the delay time until the complete open state elapses. Therefore, even when a power failure occurs when the open / close member is in the open state (complete open state), the closing operation period can be prolonged, and the open / close member shifts to the close operation after being completely open. Can.

Further, in FIG. 93 (a), the process of waiting for the delay time to reach the completely open state (step S46) and the process of outputting the off data to the second output port 134 (step S40b) are correct. You may perform after the data storage process for determination (steps S41 to S44). Furthermore, in FIG. 93 (a), a process (step S40a) of outputting off data to an output port other than the second output port 134 (the third output port 135, the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137). The processing may be performed after the legitimacy determination data storage process (steps S41 to S44).
Of course, as in the first modification, the present modification can also be applied to the case where the processing of step S36 to step S45 of the main processing in the above embodiment is performed by timer interrupt processing.

  Thus, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification has a gaming port provided with winning openings (the special fluctuation winning devices 38, 39 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37) which are opened and closed by the opening and closing members (opening and closing doors 38c and 39c and the movable member 37b). Opening / closing member solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b,) which converts the opening / closing member from the closed state (the state where the big winning opening and the general charge are closed) to the open state (the state where the large winning opening and the general electricity is open) 39b, a common electric solenoid 37c), open / close control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the open / close member solenoid, counting means (game control apparatus 100) for counting the number of game balls winning in the winning opening; The blackout determination means (game control apparatus 100) for determining whether or not it is generated, and the counting means is determined by the blackout determination means to have a blackout (step S38; And the opening / closing control means does not execute counting of the number of gaming balls (step S39), and the opening / closing control means changes the opening / closing member to the open state (outputs on data to the second output port 134), Blockage control (output of off data to the second output port 134) for returning to the blockage state can be performed, and it is determined by the power failure determination unit that a power failure has occurred (step S38; Y) In addition, the block control is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed (step S40b).

Therefore, when a power failure occurs, the closing control for returning the opening / closing member to the closed state is executed after a predetermined time elapses, so that the period during the closing operation can be prolonged, and the interest caused by the power failure is reduced. It can be suppressed.
In addition, by performing the closing control for returning the opening and closing member to the closing state after a predetermined time has elapsed, it is possible to shift to a natural closing operation even when a power failure occurs, which impairs the player's interest (cut away ) There is no.

  Specifically, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the opening / closing members (opening / closing doors 38c and 39c and the movable member 37b) are being converted to the open state (the state in which the big winning opening and the public gate are open). If it is determined that a power failure has occurred by the power failure determination means (game control device 100) (step S38; Y), after the predetermined time has elapsed, after the open / close member has reached the open state (step S46 Is configured to be

That is, the open / close control means (game control apparatus 100) is determined by the power failure determination means (game control apparatus 100) that a power failure has occurred during the opening operation of the open / close members (open / close doors 38c, 39c and movable member 37b) (Step S38; Y), the closing control is executed after the open / close member reaches the open state (after step S46, ie, after the delay time until the complete open state has elapsed) (step S38) It is comprised like S40 b).
Therefore, when a power failure occurs, the closing control for returning the open / close member to the closed state is executed after the open / close member is in the completely open state, so that the closing operation period can be prolonged. It is possible to effectively suppress the decline in interest due to the occurrence of a power failure.

<Modification 5>
For example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), a sixth output port for outputting operation data of a lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member 38i in the first special variation winning device 38 instead of the second output port 134. A seventh output port 134b for outputting operation data of the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b and the common pressure solenoid 37c is provided. Also, instead of the first driver 138a, a sixth driver (drive circuit) 138a1 that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal by receiving an operation data signal of the lever solenoid 38f output from the sixth output port 134a, and a seventh output A seventh driver (drive circuit) 138a2 is provided which generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to operation data signals of the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b and the common power solenoid 37c output from the port 134b. The sixth driver 138a1 and the seventh driver 138a2 may be configured to be supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply apparatus 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the main processing shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 is replaced with the processing (step S40) of outputting off data to all output ports, and outputs other than the seventh output port 134b. A process (step S40c) of outputting off data to the ports (the third output port 135, the fourth output port 136, the fifth output port 137, and the sixth output port 134a) Processing for waiting for the delay time until the doors 38c and 39c and the movable member 37b to be fully opened (step S46), and processing for outputting off data to the seventh output port 134b after the delay time has elapsed. It is also possible to configure to perform (Step S40d).

  By this configuration, as in the case of the fourth modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), not when the power failure occurs (t142), but for a predetermined time after the power failure occurs (specifically, Is the same time as the time from the start of the opening operation to the complete opening state) (t143), the winning opening and the door for the portable door (opening and closing doors 38c and 39c and the movable member 37b Since the closing operation of the) is started, the closing operation period (the period which seems to be advantageous to the player) can be prolonged, and the player does not feel lost. Further, regardless of the timing of occurrence of the power failure, the opening / closing member can be shifted to the closing operation after being in the completely open state, so that the interest of the player is not impaired.

Furthermore, by this configuration, when a power failure occurs during the opening operation of the open / close door 38c, the lever solenoid 38f is immediately turned off (the lever member 38i covers the positive change operation area 38h and the gaming ball flows in) (In a state where it can not be done), so there is no harm to the player's interest.
Specifically, the presence or absence of the inflow (pass) of the gaming ball to the probability variation operation area 38h is determined in the special figure game process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process. As described above, since the timer interrupt process is prohibited when a power failure occurs, even if the game ball flows into the probability change operation area 38h during the power failure, the flow is not reflected (that is, during the power failure) The inflow of gaming balls into the probability variation operation area 38h can not be a trigger for high probability state occurrence). Therefore, the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (when the lever member 38i is retracted from the definite change operation area 38h and the gaming ball can flow in) during the blackout, and the game ball is transferred to the positive change operation area 38h during the blackout. Even if the inflow occurs, the high probability state triggered by the inflow does not occur after the power failure is restored, and the expectation is disappointing, which may harm the player's interest.

  On the other hand, as in the present modification, the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the common electric solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f can be separately controlled, and when a power failure occurs, the special winning opening solenoid 38b, By prolonging the closing operation period by configuring the lever solenoid 38g to be turned off immediately while the 39b and the common solenoid 37c are turned off after the delay time has elapsed (a period of time which seems to be advantageous to the player can be prolonged). ) And because it is possible to both prevent the inflow of gaming balls into the probability change operation area 38h during a power failure (prevent the possibility of becoming disappointing), the interest of the player is lowered. Can be effectively prevented.

  In this modification, not only when a power failure occurs while the opening and closing members (opening and closing doors 38c and 39c and the movable member 37b) are open (as shown in FIG. 93 (b)), Even when a power failure occurs when the open / close member is in the open state (complete open state), the off data is output to the seventh output port 134b after the delay time until the complete open state elapses. Therefore, even when a power failure occurs when the open / close member is in the open state (complete open state), the closing operation period can be prolonged, and the open / close member shifts to the close operation after being completely open. Can.

Further, in FIG. 94 (b), the process of outputting the off data to the seventh output port 134b without performing the process (step S46) to wait for the delay time to reach the completely open state to elapse (step S40d). Can be configured to be performed after the validity determination data storage process (steps S41 to S44).
Further, in FIG. 94 (b), the process of waiting for the delay time to reach the completely open state (step S46) and the process of outputting the off data to the seventh output port 134b (step S40d) are correct. You may perform after the data storage process for determination (steps S41 to S44). Further, in FIG. 94 (b), the off data is output to the output ports other than the seventh output port 134b (the third output port 135, the fourth output port 136, the fifth output port 137, and the sixth output port 134a). The process (step S40c) may also be performed after the validity determination data storage process (steps S41 to S44).

Further, in FIG. 94 (b), the process of waiting for the delay time to reach the completely open state to elapse (step S46) and the process of outputting the off data to the seventh output port 134b (step S40d) are not performed. It is also possible to configure.
Of course, as in the first modification, the present modification can also be applied to the case where the processing of step S36 to step S45 of the main processing in the above embodiment is performed by timer interrupt processing.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present modification includes the movable member solenoid (lever solenoid 38f) for driving a predetermined movable member (lever member 38i) other than the opening / closing members (opening / closing doors 38c and 39c and the movable member 37b). And movable control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the movable member solenoid, wherein the movable control means is in an initial state of the predetermined movable member (the lever member 38i covers the positive change operation area 38h and the gaming ball flows in) When it is possible to execute return control (output of off data to the sixth output port 134a) for returning to the state where it can not be performed, and it is determined that a power failure has occurred by the power failure determination means (game control device 100) In step S38; Y), return control is immediately executed (step S40c).
Therefore, when a power failure occurs, a return control for returning the movable member to the initial state is immediately executed, so that it is possible to effectively suppress a decrease in interest due to the occurrence of the power failure.

In the above embodiment and the above modifications, a lever member 38i for opening and closing the positive change operation area 38h and a positive change operation area switch 38d for detecting gaming balls having flowed into the positive change operation area 38h are provided. Although the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the high probability state after the end of the special game state based on the detection of the game ball by the switch 38d, the present invention is not limited thereto.
That is, a movable member for opening and closing a specific area and a specific area switch (V switch) for detecting gaming balls having flowed into the specific area are provided, and a player is detected based on the detection of the gaming area by the specific area switch It may be configured to generate an advantageous state for the

Further, the movable member is not limited to the member that opens and closes the specific area, and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the movable member solenoid is not limited to the solenoid controlled by the game control device 100, and may be a solenoid controlled by the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of. Also, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be combined appropriately and applied.

  Further, it should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

10 gaming machine 37 normal fluctuation winning device (winning opening)
37b Movable member (opening and closing member)
37c General-purpose solenoid (solenoid for opening and closing member)
38 1st Special Variation Prize Winning Device (Prize)
38b Lower large winning opening solenoid (solenoid for opening and closing member)
38c Opening and closing door (opening and closing member)
38f Lever solenoid (movable member solenoid)
38i Lever member (movable member)
39 2nd Special Variation Winning Device (Prize)
38b Large winning opening solenoid (solenoid for opening and closing member)
39c Opening and closing door (opening and closing member)
100 Game Control Device (Open / Close Control Means, Counting Means, Timekeeping Means, Power Failure Determination Means, Memory Means, Validity Determination Means, Data Generation Means, Movable Control Means)

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine provided with a winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening and closing member,
An opening / closing member solenoid that converts the opening / closing member from the closed state to the open state;
Game control means for controlling the game in an integrated manner;
The game control means
Operation processing means for performing required operation processing by the game control program;
Storage means capable of storing information updated by the arithmetic processing means and capable of storing and holding the stored information even if power supply to the game machine is stopped;
Validity determination means for determining the validity of the information stored and held in the storage means at the time of activation;
Opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing member solenoid;
Counting means for counting the number of game balls that have won in the winning opening;
Blackout judging means for judging whether or not a blackout has occurred;
Power outage coping means for performing processing for coping with power outage when power outage occurs ;
The counting unit is configured not to count the number of gaming balls when it is determined by the power failure determination unit that a power failure has occurred.
The opening / closing control means changes the state of an output port for outputting control data of the opening / closing member solenoid to open control for converting the opening / closing member to the open state, and returns the state to the closed state. Blockage control, and can be performed,
The blackout countermeasure means
When the power failure judging means judges that a power failure has occurred, a checksum for use in judging the validity of the information stored and held in the memory means without switching the state of the output port Calculate and store in the storage means,
A game machine characterized in that the check sum includes control data of the solenoid for an opening and closing member which is output to the output port when it is determined by the power failure determination unit that a power failure has occurred . A movable member solenoid for driving a predetermined movable member other than the opening / closing member;
A movable control unit configured to control the movable member solenoid;
The movable control means is
It is possible to execute return control for returning the predetermined movable member to the initial state,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the return control is immediately executed when it is determined by the power failure determination unit that a power failure has occurred.

Images